Apollo V9.5R2 Reference Manual
Apollo V9.5R2 Reference Manual
Reference Manual
Version 9.5R2
Document Revision 01
Published: June 2021
Apollo Reference Manual
V9.5R2
Catalog No: X18956
Drawing No: 497016-2701-213-A00
June 2021
Revision 01
ECI's qualification lab is accredited by A2LA for competence in electrical testing according
to the International Standard ISO IEC 17025-2005 General Requirements for the
Competence of Testing and Calibration Laboratories.
Copyright by ©Ribbon Communications Inc., including its affiliates, 2012-2021. All rights reserved worldwide.
ECI is a Ribbon affiliate and part of the Ribbon group of companies (“Ribbon”).
This is a legal agreement between you, the end user, and ECI Ltd. (“ECI”). BY OPENING THE DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK
PACKAGE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS
OF THIS AGREEMENT, PROMPTLY RETURN THE UNOPENED DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK PACKAGE AND THE
ACCOMPANYING ITEMS (INCLUDING WRITTEN MATERIALS AND BINDERS OR OTHER CONTAINERS), TO THE PLACE FROM
WHICH YOU OBTAINED THEM.
All documentation and/or disk and all information and/or data contained in the documentation and/or disk ["ECI's Proprietary"] is ECI's
proprietary and is subject to all copyright, patent, and other laws protecting intellectual property, and any international treaty provisions,
as well as any specific agreement protecting ECI's rights in the aforesaid information. Any use of ECI's Proprietary for any purposes
[included but not limited: published, reproduced, or disclosed to third parties, in whole or in part] other than those for which it was disclosed,
without the express prior written permission of ECI, is strictly forbidden.
ECI's Proprietary is provided "AS IS" and may contain flaws, omissions, or typesetting errors. No responsibility and or liability whatsoever
are assumed by ECI for you or any other party, for the use thereof, nor for the rights of third parties, nor for any loss or damage whatsoever
or howsoever caused, arising directly or indirectly in connection with ECI's Proprietary, which may be affected in any way by the use
and/or dissemination thereof. ECI reserves the right, without prior notice or liability, to make changes in equipment design or specifications
including any change in and to the ECI's Proprietary.
Any representation(s) in ECI's Proprietary concerning performance of ECI's product(s) are for informational purposes only and are not
warranties of product performance or otherwise, either express or implied. No warranty is granted nor liability assumed in relation thereto,
unless specifically undertaken in ECI's sales contract or order confirmation. ECI's Proprietary is periodically updated, and changes will be
incorporated in subsequent editions. All graphics included in this document are for illustrative purposes only and might not correspond
with your specific product version.
The documentation and/or disk and all information contained therein is owned by ECI and is protected by all relevant copyright, patent,
and other applicable laws and international treaty provisions. Therefore, you must treat the information contained in the documentation
and disk as any other copyrighted material (for example, a book or musical recording).
Other Restrictions. You may not rent, lease, sell, or otherwise dispose of ECI's Proprietary, as applicable.
YOU MAY NOT USE, COPY, MODIFY, OR TRANSFER THE DOCUMENTATION AND/OR DISK OR ANY COPY IN WHOLE OR PART,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PROVIDED IN THIS LICENSE. ALL RIGHTS NOT EXPRESSLY GRANTED ARE RESERVED BY ECI.
All trademarks mentioned herein are the property of their respective holders.
Notwithstanding the generality of the aforementioned, you expressly waive any claim and/or demand regarding liability for indirect, special,
incidental, or consequential loss or damage which may arise in respect of ECI's Proprietary contained therein, howsoever caused, even
if advised of the possibility of such damages.
The end user hereby undertakes and acknowledges that they read the "Before You Start/Safety Guidelines" instructions (when provided
by ECI) and that such instructions were understood by them. ECI shall not be liable to you or to any other party for any loss or damage
whatsoever or howsoever caused, arising directly or indirectly in connection with you fulfilling and/or failure to fulfill in whole or in part the
"Before You Start/Safety Guidelines" instructions.
Contents
Useful information ................................................................................................ xiii
Related documents .....................................................................................................................xiii
Contact information .....................................................................................................................xiii
Revision history ..........................................................................................................................xiii
14 Accessories................................................................................................. 14-1
14.1 Power Distribution Units (PDU) ....................................................................................14-1
14.1.1 PDU55AL ....................................................................................................................... 14-2
14.1.2 PDU77AL ....................................................................................................................... 14-5
14.1.3 PDU99 ............................................................................................................................ 14-9
14.2 RAP-E ........................................................................................................................14-13
14.3 xRAP-100 ...................................................................................................................14-17
14.4 RAP-4B ......................................................................................................................14-21
14.5 AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 power system ..........................................................................14-23
14.5.1 AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 front view ................................................................................... 14-24
14.5.2 AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 rear view.................................................................................... 14-25
14.6 AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW power system .............................................................................14-27
14.6.1 AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW front view ...................................................................................... 14-28
14.6.2 AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW rear view....................................................................................... 14-29
14.7 Fiber storage accessories ..........................................................................................14-31
14.7.1 FST............................................................................................................................... 14-31
14.7.2 Fiber spooler ................................................................................................................ 14-32
14.8 FMT-1U patch panel...................................................................................................14-33
14.8.1 FMT4F-10x10G-MM fiber connection module.............................................................. 14-33
14.8.2 FMT4F-2x4x10G-SM fiber connection module ............................................................ 14-34
14.8.3 FMT4F-2x4x10G-MM fiber connection module ............................................................ 14-34
14.9 Cable guiding accessories .........................................................................................14-35
14.9.1 Fiber and cable guide ................................................................................................... 14-35
14.9.2 Fiber bridges ................................................................................................................ 14-37
14.10 External fiber duct ......................................................................................................14-37
Related documents
Apollo Documentation Suite
STMS Documentation Suite
LightSOFT® Documentation Suite
Contact information
Telephone Email
Revision history
Revision Section Description
1 N/A New
In the OPT9932 and OPT9914, the platforms are operated in a redundant configuration, in which the
main controller card is protected with a second identical card. The redundant card contains a database
identical to the active card, and operates as a full capability standby control and communication card.
The controller subsystem enables easy software upgrades using a remote software procedure operated
from the STMS® management system. It can store several different software versions at the same time
and enables quick switchover between the different versions when required.
Communications module
All OPT99xx platform configurations work with a communications module, featuring:
Electrical interface connectors that are integrated into the I/O modules, eliminating the need for
separate electrical interface modules
Easy routing of external management interfaces
A monitoring system for acceptance test purposes
Hot insertion of cards and modules to support quick maintenance and repair activities, without
affecting traffic
The xCTM and internal and external timing paths are fully redundant. The distributed BIT mechanism
ensures top performance and availability.
To provide a reliable timing source, the OPT99xx is hardware ready to support multiple synchronization
reference options. Up to seven of the following timing references can be monitored simultaneously by
each OPT99xx platform:
2 x 2MHz/1.5MHz (T3) external timing input sources
2 x E1 (T3) external timing input sources
1588v2 (In clock, 1PPS, ToD) External
1588v2 (PTP massages)
2 x Reference clock from Line cards (like Sync-E/Sync-O)
Mate CTM (Mate xRCP/xRCP1)
High Availability of the timing system is guaranteed by the fact that the OPT99xx is always operating
with two xRCP/xRCP1 cards in the shelf. HA includes also the xCTM function redundancy. The active
xCTM always resides on the active xRCP/xRCP1 and HA switch-over refers both to xRCP/xRCP1 and
xCTM logics.
The xCTM provides direct control over the source selection (which it receives from the system software)
and the frequency control loop. The definition of the synchronization source depends on the source
quality and on the synchronization mode, according to the network timing topology.
The operator can remotely manage network synchronization and can select and determine the priority
for each OPT99xx timing source reference.
Synchronization references are classified at any given time according to a predefined priority and
prevailing signal quality. The Apollo OPT99xx synchronization subsystem synchronizes to the best
available timing source using the Synchronization Status Message (SSM) protocol. The system is
synchronized to this central timing source.
In addition, the system provides synchronization outputs to synchronize external equipment within the
site. Two external T4 interfaces can provide 2 MHz/E1 external timing as required. These outputs can
be used to synchronize any peripheral equipment or switch.
Apollo supplies a 4.6 ppm stable holdover mode when all alternative synchronization sources are
temporarily unavailable.
Apollo default clock accuracy complies with applicable ITU-T and Telcordia standards at the network
level. Optional G.812 or G.811 synchronization quality can be provided using additional external units.
In addition, the system infrastructure supports distributions of phase and frequency synchronization via
1PPS and ToD interfaces.
The fabric matrix cards receive the traffic from the various xIO cards installed in the platform through
wideband buses, using a format that does not depend on the type of xIO card installed in any specific
slot. At any time, the main and protection card are active (that is, switch the traffic).
The fabric supports ODU XC at the ODUk level for Layer-1 services and ODU-Flex for Layer-2 services.
The XC is supported for cards residing on the same platform.
NOTE: The generic name xPFM is used to describe features that are common to both
types: xPFM-14 and xPFM-32.
The output voltage of a redundant xPFM pair is connected together to a bus-bar that feeds an area in
the shelf (specific slots of its responsibility). The module with the higher voltage provides the power to
the shelf area. If a fault occurs in the active xPFM, the standby takes over and is capable of supplying
the full power to that area.
The following figure shows the power distribution structure in the OPT9914. In this figure, the color of
an xPFM-14 pair is identical to the color of the corresponding cards it is feeding. For example, the color
of the pair xPFM-14 A1 and xPFM-14 B1 is blue and it is feeding the following cards: xMIM-L, xTAM,
xMIM-R, xFCM-M, xRCP-A, xRCP-B, xFM-1, xFM-2, xIO-00, and xIO-01.
In the OPT9914, the power sources are connected to the xPFM-14 cards via a PDU55AL, PDU77AL, or
PDU99 unit. In the OPT9932, the power sources are connected directly to xCBM modules, saving the
need for an external PDU.
In the OPT9932, an xCBM module connects the input power source to the xPFM-32.
There are 12 independent xCBMs in the platform arranged in six pairs. To ensure platform power
redundancy each module in a pair must be connected to a different source. The xCBM provides a PDU-
like functionality for the OPT9932, saving the need for an external PDU. Each xCBM feeds an xPFM-32
installed under it, which in-turn feeds the cards (xRCP, xFM, xMIM, xIO, etc.) and subsystems in the
OPT9932. The two leftmost pairs must always be connected to power, as they provide power to
common cards and subsystems.
The left xCBM in a pair connects to source A and the right to source B. The following figure identifies
the xCBMs and the corresponding power sources. The colors of the xPFM-32 cards correspond to
colors of the cards they are feeding.
In the OPT9914 platform, fan units in the upper part of the platform pump cooling air from right and
expel the hot air through the exhaust to the left. Fan units in the lower part pump cooling air from the
bottom over the components; the hot air is expelled through the exhaust in the mid-section.
NOTE: The generic term xFCM is used to describe functions that are common to all xFCM
types.
To increase the OPT99xx reliability, air is pumped into the system by the xFCMs through air filters that
reduce dust and air particles that can be accumulated on the fans.
The different xFCM types have the same electrical design and principal of operation and differ only in
the number of fans and mechanical layout. Because there is no redundancy for each xFCM, high
availability must be guaranteed by each fan unit. This is achieved by a separate power supply and
controller for each fan in the xFCM.
xFCM fan control mechanism is based on temperature sensors located on each common and xIO card
in the OPT99xx platforms. The sensor measures the ambient temperature in each card and reports it to
the active xRCP/xRCP1. The xRCP/xRCP1 processes this data and in-turn sends control signals to the
corresponding fan controller. The controller can change the speed of the fan in 16 steps to keep the
temperature in the allowed range. The speed change is controlled by changing a Pulse Width
Modulator (PWM).
The xFCM is turned into turbo mode (fans operate in highest speed) in case a major failure is detected
like, failure of the xRCP/xRCP1, control bus, etc.
Functions
Out-of-band management Ethernet port supporting 10/100/1000 Mbps, connected to the STMS.
Four slave management interfaces for subtending platforms; enables managing five shelves with
a single IP (future option).
Redundancy of management interfaces by a second xMIM (optional); both operate together in a
1:1 protection mode (future option).
2.1 xRCP/xRCP1
Supported platforms
OPT9932
OPT9914
Description
The xRCP/xRCP1 is the central control component in the OPT99xx platforms, providing the main
system processor responsible for essential system management, timing, and control. The card supports
timing functionality for a wide range of synchronization standards by the Central Timing Module (xCTM)
residing on it. In addition, xRCP/xRCP1 cards include a Fabric Element (FE) used as part of the
OPT99xx system fabric.
xRCP/xRCP1 cards enable comprehensive management communication functionality with dynamic
OSPF routing. These cards are responsible for communications with external NEs and network
management (STMS) communication. xRCP/xRCP1 cards can be configured for 1:1 redundancy. All
connectivity from the xRCP/xRCP1 to any card is kept redundant via the dedicated internal
communication links.
Functions
The xRCP/xRCP1 provides the following main functions:
Control:
Control and alarms from/to all other cards in the platforms
Software versions management
Downloads SW to the managed xIO cards
Collects PM and log information
SNCP traffic protection
Fabric control
Collects ONCP information
Supports xRCP/xRCP1 redundancy by two cards operating in 1:1 protection scheme (High
Availability - HA)
Management:
Connectivity to the STMS/LCT-STMS management systems
Supports DCN network functionality
Management of subtending shelves (future)
Timing:
Distributes timing signals to all cards
Synchronizing 3rd party equipment via external timing interfaces (on xTAM)
Hardware ready to support various clock signals including: BITS (T3/T4), 1588v2 (10 MHz,
1PPS, ToD), Sync-E
Redundancy via xCTM located on each xRCP/xRCP1
Fabric system:
FEs on the xRCP/xRCP1 cards are part of the universal fabric
7+2 or 8+1 fabric protection scheme available in the OPT9932
3+1 fabric protection scheme available in the OPT9914
Provides connectivity and fabric switching functions between xIO cards in OPT99xx platforms
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
Port indicators
Marking Connector Functions
CONSOLE RJ-45 connector Serial RS-232 communication port for use by technical support
personnel (debug, maintenance, etc.).
EXP1 RJ-45 connector L2 debug port
EXP2 RJ-45 connector L3 debug port
CRAFT RJ-45 connector Management interface for connecting to an LCT
LED indicators
Marking Item Functions
Controller LEDs
ACT Green LED On -
During upload time
xRCP/xRCP1 is active and has no BIT failure
Off - xRCP/xRCP1 has BIT failure
SBY Yellow LED On -
1. During upload time
2. xRCP/xRCP1 configured as SB
Blinks - One of microswitches is open
Off – xRCP/xRCP1 is defined as Active
FAIL Red LED On - xRCP/xRCP1 has BIT failure or has not come out of reset
Off - no BIT failure
Fabric LEDs
ACT Green LED On - FE (on this xRCP/xRCP1) is Active, both micro-switches are
close and no BIT failure
Off -
1. During upload time
2. One of the micro-switches is open
3. Fabric element has BIT failure
SBY Yellow LED On - During upload time or green shutdown
Off -
1. Fabric element is in service (Active)
2. Fabric element has BIT failure
FAIL Red LED On - Fabric element has BIT failure or has not come out of reset
Off - no BIT failure on the fabric element
SD LED
SD WRITE Blue LED Blinks - Writing operation on SD card
Off - No writing operation on SD card
Ethernet (RJ-45) link speed and port traffic activity LEDs
Rate Link and Speed Activity LED color
LED color
1 Gbps Green - solid Yellow – blinks
100 Mbps Yellow - solid Yellow – blinks
2.2 xFM
Supported platforms
OPT9932
OPT9914
Description
The xFM card is part of the universal fabric in <OPT9XX> platforms together with FEs residing on the
xRCP/xRCP1 cards.
Functions
The xFM provides the following main functions:
TDM (ODU) and data (packet) matrix
Multicast transmission at the fabric level
Fabric redundancy scheme (HA)
200G per xIO slot (phase 1) and 400G (phase 2)
Card can be removed without affecting traffic
Note that the FE on each xRCP/xRCP1 is always active, even on the xRCP/xRCP1 that is in Standby
mode. From this perspective the FEs on the xRCP/xRCP1 are independent entities, physically located
on the xRCP/xRCP1 and powered from its circuits.
The traffic is coming in via the xIO card, which converts it to a common structure regardless of the
ingress traffic type. This fabric can process this common type. In the opposite, the fabric provides the
traffic in the common structure to a xIO card that translated the traffic back to a format required at the
egress port of this card.
The xFM also transmits multicast traffic as required to different parts of the fabric system. In addition, it
is responsible to transmit multicast traffic to required xIO cards connected to the fabric system.
The xFM and FE on the xRAPs operate in N+m protection mode. All fabric elements in the system are
active and forwarding traffic. In case an xFM, an FE on an xRCP/xRCP1, or a link fails, the traffic
continues to flow through the available links. The OPT9914 operates with 4 FMs in a 3+1 protection
scheme; it means that if one of the fabric elements is not active the system continues to work without
performance degradation.
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
Marking Item Functions
ACTIVE Green LED On - the xFM is Active, both micro-switches are closed and no BIT
failure was detected.
Off -
1. During upload time
2. One of the micro-switches is open
3. xFM has BIT failure
NOT IS Yellow LED On - During software upload
Blinks - one µswitch is open
Off -
1. In Service (xFM is Active)
2. xFM has a BIT failure
FAIL Red LED On - xFM has BIT failure or has not come out of reset
Off - no BIT failure
2.3 xMIM
Supported platforms
OPT9932
OPT9914
Description
The xMIM is the connection unit between the OPT99xx family and the external management. It is
installed at the upper part of the OPT9914 section or at the middle section of the OPT9932 platform
(near the xRCP-A).
Functions
The xMIM provides the following main functions:
Out-of-band management interface for connecting an STMS
Four management ports for cascading up to four OPT96xx or OPT9914 platforms (future)
Connects to both xRCP/xRCP1 cards to support service continuity in case one of the
xRCP/xRCP1 fails
Management redundancy can be supported by two xMIM cards working in a 1:1 protection
scheme (future)
Card views
General view
Front panel
LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
ACT Green LED On –
1. During upload time
2. xMIM is Active and no BIT failure
Off - xMIM has BIT failure
SB Yellow LED On -
1. During upload time
2. xMIM is Active and no BIT failure
Off - xMIM is defined as Active
FAIL Red LED On -
1. During upload time
2. xMIM has BIT failure
Off - no BIT failure
IMG RJ-45 connector Out-of-band management Ethernet interface
(10/100/1000BaseT) for connecting to an element
management station (STMS) or a CLI terminal.
MULTI SHELF Four RJ-45 Management interface (10/100/1000BaseT) for connecting
MNG. 1 to 4 connectors management to up to 4 subtending shelves.
RJ45 Connector LEDs
Port link Green LED Indicate the port link rate:
3 blinks and pause - 1 Gbps
2 blinks and pause - 100 Mbps
1 blink and pause - 10 Mbps
Off - During upload time
Port Activity Yellow LED Indicate the port activity:
Blinks - Activity
Off -
1. During upload time
2. No Activity
2.4 xTAM
Supported platforms
OPT9932
OPT9914
Description
xTAM is the Timing and Alarm interfaces Module, serving as the connection between the OPT99xx
platforms and the external world. It provides interfaces for timing and alarms. The xTAM is installed at
the upper part of the OPT9914 or middle part of the OPT9932 between the two xMIM cards. It is
connected to both xRCP/xRCP1 cards and provides a physical interface between the OPT99xx
platforms, the synchronization system (BITS, 1588v2), and the alarms system (severity, in/out).
Functions
The xTAM features:
Hardware ready for terminating/driving BITS (T3/T4) and 1588v2 (Clk, 1PPS, ToD) standard
interfaces to/from the xCTM.
Terminates Alarm In (through opto-couplers) and drives system and Alarms Out directly to the
client or through a PDU relay dry contacts.
Provides a LED Test pushbutton to check all LEDs in the system.
Provides an ACO pushbutton that stops the buzzer of the system.
The xTAM provides the following main functions:
Timing and synchronization inputs and outputs, including:
BITS-T3/BITS-T4 (for future support)
1 PPS for supporting IEEE 1588v2 (for future support)
ToD for supporting IEEE 1588v2 (for future support)
10 MHz clock for IEEE 1588v2 (for future support)
Alarm interfaces and indications, including:
Severity alarm outputs (Critical, Major, Minor)
External alarm outputs and inputs:
4 output alarms (relay dry contacts)
4 input alarms (opto-couplers)
LEDs for displaying the operation and alarms of the system
Activations, including:
LED tests for the entire platform
ACO
Card views
General view
Front panel
LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
ACT Green LED On:
During upload time
xTAM is Active and no BIT failure
Off: xTAM has BIT failure
FAIL Red LED On:
During upload time
xTAM has BIT failure
Off: no BIT failure
System Severity Alarm LEDs
CR Red LED On: System has a Critical Alarm
Off:
During upload time
no Alarms
MJ Orange LED On: System has a Major Alarm
Off:
During upload time
no Alarms
MIN Yellow LED On: System has a Minor Alarm
Off:
During upload time
no Alarms
2.5 xTEM
Supported platforms
OPT9932
Description
The xTEM is an optional extension module for the xTAM card. The OPT9914 uses a PDU for power
supply and alarm connectivity. The OPT9932 is designed with direct connections to the power sources
(via the xCBM modules) and PDU is not used with it. To support client alarm connectivity and other
PDU functions, the xTEM emulates PDU-like functionality for the OPT9932. The xTEM is an optional
card in the OPT9932. In addition to client alarms, it provides a buzzer and system alarms LEDs.
Functions
Alarms:
Severity alarms – Critical, Major, Minor
4 x output alarms
4 x Input alarms
Buzzer
LED test pushbutton
System severity LEDs: Critical, Major, Minor.
Card views
General view
Front panel
LEDs
2.6 xPFM-14
Supported platforms
OPT9914
Description
The xPFM-14 is an input power filter for the DC voltage connected to the OPT9914. Each platform has
up to six xPFM-14 units for redundancy purposes. To support redundancy, the xPFM-14 work in pairs,
where each module is connected to a different power source. Each pair is responsible to supply power
to one feed area in the OPT9914. The output voltages of each module in a pair are connected together
and the module with the higher voltage supplies power to the dedicated area. In case of a failure in the
active xPFM-14, the standby module takes over and supply the full power. The faulty unit can be
replaced without affecting traffic.
Functions
The xPFM-14 provides the following main functions:
Input DC voltage filtering (-48 V)
Control and alarms
Temperature sensing
Input voltage monitoring
Card views
General view
Front panel
LEDs
2.7 xFCM-14
Supported platforms
OPT9914
Description
The OPT9914 has two types of fan trays that provide cooling air to the platform: xFCMV-14, and
xFCMH-14. The two types have identical electronic design and cooling and control functionality, and
differ only in physical structure and number of fan units. The xFCMV-14 includes six fans and the
FCMH-14 eight. The fans are fed through circuits that improve the system's performance and support
its redundancy.
NOTE: The generic name xFCM-14 is used through this manual to describe functions
related to both card types.
Functions
Features of the xFCM-14 include:
Separate power supply for each fan unit
Each adjacent pair of fans have a control of its own:
Multiple speed levels are defined for each pair; see System Specifications for details
The levels are controlled by the active xRCP/xRCP1 via a control bus
Separate psophometric filter with a separate fuse for each fan
Large capacitor with a fuse on the DC supply bus
Parallel dual inrush current circuit with a separate fuse for each circuit
Hold up capacitors (serves the xPFM-14)
A controller in the active xRCP/xRCP1 controls the fans operation. If one of the fans fails, the remaining
start to operate in turbo mode and the fail LED lights until the xFCM-14 is replaced. If done in a few
minutes, the xFCM-14 can be extracted and replaced without interrupting the OPT9914 operation (hot
swapping).
WARNING: Do not leave the system without one of the fan tray units for more than five
minutes.
Card views
General view
General view
LEDs
xFCMH-14
xFCMV-14
2.8 xCBM
Supported platforms
OPT9932
Description
The xCBM provides power input terminals for connecting the - 48 VDC power source to the xPFM-32
card. Each xPFM-32 connects to an independent xCBM, totaling up to 12 xCBM modules in an
OPT9932 platform. The OPT9932 comes with 12 xCBM modules installed in the platform.
You must connect power source input cables and install the circuit breaker on each xCBM. These
procedures are described in the OPT9932 Installation and Maintenance Manual.
There are 12 independent xCBMs in the platform arranged in six pairs. To ensure platform power
redundancy each module in a pair must be connected to a different source. The xCBM provides a PDU-
like functionality for the OPT9932, saving the need for an external PDU. Each xCBM feeds an xPFM-32
installed under it, which in-turn feeds the cards (xRCP, xFM, xMIM, xIO, etc.) and subsystems in the
OPT9932. The two leftmost pairs must always be connected to power, as they provide power to
common cards and subsystems.
The left xCBM in a pair connects to source A and the right to source B. The following figure identifies
the xCBMs and the corresponding power sources. The colors of the xPFM-32 cards correspond to
colors of the cards they are feeding.
Functions
Sockets for the Circuit Breaker (CB)
Surge protection
Connector for the xPFM-32 card
Pin guide for connection of the xPFM-32
Card views
General view
2.9 xPFM-32
Supported platforms
OPT9932
Description
The xPFM-32 is an input power filter for the DC voltage connected to the OPT9932. Each platform has
up to 12 xPFM-32 units for redundancy purposes. To support redundancy, the xPFM-32 work in pairs,
where each module is connected to a different power source. Each pair is responsible to supply power
to one feed area in the OPT9932. The output voltages of each module in a pair are connected together
and the module with the higher voltage supplies power to the dedicated area. In case of a failure in the
active xPFM-32, the standby module takes over and supply the full power. The faulty unit can be
replaced without affecting traffic.
The connection of the xPFM-32 to the power source is made through two power plugs at the rear of the
card; one plugs into a socket on the xCBM module and the other plugs into the OPT9932 motherboard.
The following figure shows the xPFM-32 with the two power plugs. To ensure good contact of the power
plugs with their mates, a guide pin in the xCBM is inserted into the xPFM-32 during its insertion.
Functions
The xPFM-32 provides the following main functions:
Input DC voltage filtering (-48 V)
Control and alarms
Temperature sensing
Input voltage monitoring
Reverse polarity protection
Surge protection (2 kV line to line, 4 kV line to ground)
Redundancy between PFM units
Passive 10 msec Hold-up capacitors
Under voltage detection
Lightning strike protection
Input power measurement
Fail indication
Card views
General view
Front panel
LEDs
2.10 xFCM-32
Supported platforms
OPT9932
Description
The OPT9932 has two types of fan trays that provide cooling air to the platform: xFCMV-32, and
xFCMH-32. The two types have identical electronic design and cooling and control functionality, and
differ only in physical structure and number of fan units. The xFCMV-32 includes six fans and the
FCMH-32 ten. The fans are fed through circuits that improve the system's performance and support its
redundancy.
NOTE: The generic name xFCM-32 is used to describe functions related to both card
types.
Functions
Features of the xFCM-32 include:
Separate power supply for each fan unit
Each adjacent pair of fans have a control of its own:
Multiple speed levels are defined for each pair; see System Specifications for details
The levels are controlled by the active xRCP/xRCP1 via a control bus
Separate psophometric filter with a separate fuse for each fan
Large capacitor with a fuse on the DC supply bus
Parallel dual inrush current circuit with a separate fuse for each circuit
Hold up capacitors (serves the xPFM-32)
A controller in the active xRCP/xRCP1 controls the fans operation. If one of the fans fails, the remaining
start to operate in turbo mode and the fail LED lights until the xFCM-32 is replaced. If done in a few
minutes, the xFCM-32 can be extracted and replaced without interrupting the OPT9932 operation (hot
swapping).
WARNING: Do not leave the system without one of the fan tray units for more than five
minutes.
Card views
General view:xFCMH-32
LEDs
Name Description
HIO500 Up to 400G capacity in the current release, supporting a mixture of L1/L2 client/line
interfaces with a configurable mixture of 200G/100G/10G rates.
HIO100_2 2 x 100G CFP based ports, each port can be used as line or client, 100GbE, OTU4,
with coherent CFPs or Non-colored CFPs.
HIO10_40 Up to 400G capacity, supporting a mixture of L1/L2 interfaces with a configurable
mixture of rates, both client (OTU4, OTU2e, OTU2, 40GbE, STM-64) and line
(OTU4 with ODUflex NNI uplinks).
HIO10_20 20 port 10G multi-service interface card for any mix of: OTU2, OTU2e, STM-64/OC-
192, OC-192, FC1200, FC800, 40GbE, and 10GbE.
TIOMR_32 32 port low-rate service interface card for any mix of: STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12,
STM-16/OC-48, FC1/FC2/FC4, and GbE.
Description
The HIO500 is a single slot hybrid (OTN/packet) I/O card with ODUflex NNI uplink and G.HAO support
for the OPT9932 and OPT9914 platforms, providing 500G/400G capacity, depending on the platform
configuration. This is a configurable-rate card based on coherent transmission with adaptive
modulation, 15% SD-FEC, NCG 11-12dB, supporting a mixture of Layer1/Layer2 client/line interfaces
with a rate mixture of 200G/100G/10G.
The HIO500 enables full utilization of the OPT99xx slot capacity of 400/500 Gbps. From a management
perspective the card can be configured in two operation modes:
HIO400: With a capacity of 400 Gbps
HIO500: With a capacity of 500 Gbps (OPT9932)
The HIO500 is optimized for client/line low rate/high rate solutions that provide up to 2 x 200G lines for
short-medium ranges, or up to 5 x 100G lines for high ranges, or 5 x 100G/50 x 10G clients.
The HIO500/HIO400 works with D-CFP2 coherent line transceivers, supporting configurable QPSK,
8QAM, or 16QAM modulation, with Flex-Grid capabilities. This transceiver includes a coherent receiver,
DSP processing, and soft decision forward error correction, for superior noise tolerance, as well as an
exceptional ability to mitigate CD and PMD impairments.
When client ports are configured for 100G/OTU4, SR10 and LR4 transceivers are supported, as well as
ER4DR (40Km) and ZR4DR (80Km) for OTU4 grey output. The supported FEC mode for ZR4DR is RS-
FEC.
HIO400EN
The HIO400 card is also available with a software encryption option. When configured as an
HIO400EN, encryption is supported for OTU4 and OTUC2 rates on the line ports. Authentication is via
private/public keys, with the key period configured per NE.
Functions
The HIO500 provides the following main functions:
Elastic rate line configuration:
Up to 2 x 200G (OTUC2), where each port can be configured independently:
QPSK, for distances of over 2500km
8QAM, for distances of over 800km
16QAM, for distances of over 600km
Up to 5 x 100G (OTU4) QPSK, for ultra-long haul distances of over 3000km. Each port can
be configured independently.
Up to 5 x 10 x 10G MPO MM fanout for 10GE SR client support
Client configuration of up to 100GE/OTU4, for L1 or L2 line interfaces
High density client configuration with up to 4 x 100GbE; each port can be configured
independently
Hot insertion/removal of CFP2 transceivers without traffic affecting of other ports in the card.
Protection mechanisms:
SNCP, DRI, and DNI
Port protection (excluding 10G Fanout cases)
ASON/WSON
OLP/OMSP
Lite-Packet (L2 over ODUflex, G.HAO)
SyncE and 1588v2 synchronization
Interoperability support:
HIO100_2 for OTU4 coherent and non-coherent modes.
MIO200 for OTU4 coherent and non-coherent modes.
TR200_2 for OTU4 coherent and OTUC2. OTU4 non-coherent mode is not supported.
TM200EN for OTU4 coherent and OTUC2. OTU4 non-coherent mode is not supported.
TM400 for OTU4 coherent differential mode (DQPSK) and non-coherent modes. OTUC2 is
not supported.
Standard SC-FEC for 100Gbps line rate interoperability (supported OTR200_CFO modules).
GCC features:
GCC interoperability with the following cards:
HIO100_2
MIO200
TR200_2
TM200EN
TM400
GCC supported in standard (full rate) mode.
Up to 4 GCC channels for OTUC2/OTU4 supported.
One GCC supported per port, configurable to either GCC0, GCC1, or GCC2, user selectable.
Card views
General view
LEDs
NOTE: A port type with a rate of 200G is OTUC2 (only supported in ports 11 & 31). Port
types with rates of 100G include: OTU4, ETY100G, GE100 and GE100-OTU4.
The following table describes the supported port types for the HIO500 in the current release.
3.2 HIO100_2
Supported platforms
OPT9932
OPT9914
Description
HIO100_2 provides an OTU4 uplink for the OPT9932 and OPT 9914 platforms. HIO100_2 also
supports up to two 100G ports in a single slot card with CFP pluggable optics. The client-side signals
are mapped to G.709 ODU-k and cross connected through the central universal fabric to the egress
side.
The HIO100_2 provides a multi-service, cost-effective solution to customers for Metro, Regional, and
Long haul applications over OTN DWDM networks.
The HIO100_2 works with D-CFP coherent line transceivers that enable transmission of 100Gbps DP-
QPSK modulation, with Flex-Grid capabilities. This transceiver includes a coherent receiver, DSP
processing, and soft decision forward error correction, for superior noise tolerance, as well as an
exceptional ability to mitigate CD and PMD impairments.
Functions
The HIO100_2 provides the following main functions:
Single-slot card
2 x 100 Gbps uplink for OTN switching sites
100 G ports based on CFP pluggable. Each port can be configured by the user to one of the
following:
ETY 100G
ODU4
Optionally supports dual rate LR4 and SR10 CFPs
Hybrid data and ODUk grooming capability:
ODUk switching (L1)
Low order ODUk L1 and L2 mixing (Lite Packet)
OTU4 interfaces Metro coherent transceiver:
Dual rate LR4 and SR10 CFP transceivers and if available CFP ER4 as well
100 GbE interfaces:
Supports LR4 and SR10 CFP transceivers and if available CFP ER4 as well
Processes and multiplexes any combination of low-order ODUs and packets that arrive from the
fabric into ODU4 (100 Gbps line)
Supports port protection (IOP) for 100GE client and SNCP
GCC features:
GCC interoperability with the following cards:
HIO500
CMR100M/CMR100
TM100/TR100
TM200EN
TR200_2
TM400
GCC supported in standard (full rate) mode by default, as well as Apollo proprietary (¼ rate
GCC) reduced mode, user selectable.
Up to 2 GCC channels for OTU4 supported.
One GCC supported per port, configurable to either GCC0, GCC1, or GCC2, user selectable.
Card views
General view
Front panel
LEDs
3.3 HIO10_40
Supported platforms
OPT9932
OPT9914
Description
The HIO10_40 is a high-density single-slot QSFP-based card with full hybrid capability. This card
supports any mix of the following client interface connections to the OPT9900 universal fabric:
Maximum card capacity of 400G, in any port combination
Elastic rate client configuration:
4 x 100GbE/OTU4 L1 or L2
40 x 10GbE/OTU2e L1 or L2
40 x OTU2 L1
8 x 40GbE L1
24 x STM-64/OC-192
Line configuration of OTU4 black & white uplinks, for L1 or L2, with ODUflex NNI uplinks and
G.HAO support
SNCP and port protection
Hardware ready for SyncE and 1588v2 synchronization
GCC features:
GCC supported in standard (full rate) mode.
Up to 10 GCC channels for OTUC2/OTU4/OTU2/OTU2e supported.
One GCC supported per port, configurable to either GCC0, GCC1, or GCC2, user selectable.
Card views
General view
Front panel
LEDs
Port Transceiver OTU4 ETY100G GE100 GE100_OTU4 ETY40G ETY10GOC GE10 GE10_OTU2e OTU2/OTU2e STM64/OC192
0 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
1 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes
2 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes
3 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes
4 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
5 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes
6 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes
7 2 Yes Yes Yes Yes
8 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
9 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes
10 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes
11 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes
12 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
13 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes
14 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes
15 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes
16 5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
17 5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
18 5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
19 5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Port Transceiver OTU4 ETY100G GE100 GE100_OTU4 ETY40G ETY10GOC GE10 GE10_OTU2e OTU2/OTU2e STM64/OC192
20 6 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
21 6 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
22 6 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
23 6 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
24 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
25 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
26 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
27 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
28 8 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
29 8 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
30 8 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
31 8 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
32 9 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
33 9 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
34 9 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
35 9 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
36 10 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
37 10 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
38 10 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
39 10 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
3.4 HIO10_20
Supported platforms
OPT9932
OPT9914
Description
The HIO10_20 is a 10G multi-service interface card for the OPT9932 and OPT9914 platforms that
supports up to 20 client interfaces, SFP+ based transceivers. Each port can be configured to OTU2,
OTU2e, STM-64/OC-192, OC-192, FC1200, FC800, 40GbE, or 10GbE. Client-side signals are mapped
to G.709 ODU-k and cross connected through the central universal fabric to the egress side. Two
additional client interfaces can be configured to 40 GbE. These are QSFP+ based ports and the
configuration of such interface is at the expense of four SFP+ ports.
The HIO10_20 provides a multi-service, cost-effective solution to customers for grooming 10G services
over OTN DWDM networks.
Functions
The HIO10_20 provides the following main functions:
Single slot card
20 SFP+ based client ports, software configurable to support any mix of the following services:
OTU2
OTU2e
STM-64/OC-192
OC-192
FC1200
FC800
10 GbE
2 QSFP+ based ports software configurable to 40 GbE:
Configuration of an 40GbE port is at the expense of four SFP+ "regular" ports
Interoperability with existing OPT96xx cards
Transparent timing for SDH/SONET signals support CoC applications
End-to-end PM (including regeneration) and OTN mapping and termination
Pluggable client and line interfaces support in service upgrade
Tunable line interfaces for dynamic networks
1+1 OCH path and equipment protection based on ODU2 PM
Supports port protection (IOP) and SNCP protection
Hardware ready for SyncE and 1588v2 synchronization
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
The numbering of the HIO10_20 ports is from 0 to 21. The first two ports (0 and 1) are dedicated to
QSFP+ interfaces that can be configured only to 40 GbE. The SFP+ ports are numbered from 2 to 21.
When a QSFP+ port is configured, four SFP+ ports are disabled; for example if port number 0 is
configured the corresponding SFP+ ports 2 to 5 will be disabled.
The marking above each port identifies the Transmit (Tx) and Receive signals (Rx).
LEDs
3.5 TIOMR_32
Supported platforms
OPT9932
OPT9914
Description
The TIOMR_32 is a single-slot multi-rate interface card that supports up to 32 low-rate client interfaces
using SFP transceivers. Each port can be configured to STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, STM-16/OC-48,
FC100/FC200/FC400, or GbE. Client-side signals are mapped to G.709 ODU-k and cross connected
through the central universal fabric to the egress side. The TIOMR_32 provides a multi-service, cost-
effective solution to customers for grooming low-rate (< 10G) services over OTN DWDM networks.
Functions
The TIOMR_32 provides the following main functions:
32 SFP-based client ports, software-configurable to support any mix of the following services:
GbE (optical and electrical)
FC100
FC200
FC400
STM-1/OC-3
STM-4/OC-12
STM-16/OC-48
OTU1
Interoperability with existing OPT96xx cards
Transparent timing for SDH/SONET signals
Card views
General view
Front panel
LEDs
Cross connections are supported within the MIO cards or between cards with no limitations. The
platform must be configured with either MIO200 cards or MIO700 cards; a mixture of MIO card
types within a single platform is not supported.
Two high-availability RCP main shelf controllers (RCP04X).
Two power feed modules (PFM04X) using a -40.8 - -57.6 VDC power source.
One fan control module (FCM04X) with four fans.
One timing, alarm, and management interface module (TAMIM04X)
Filter tray.
Platform layout
Slot allocation
4.2.1 RCP04X
Supported platform
OPT9904X
Description
The RCP04X is the central control component in the platform, providing the main system processor
responsible for essential system management, timing, and control. The card supports timing
functionality for a wide range of synchronization standards by the Central Timing Module (xCTM)
residing on it.
Functions
The RCP04X provides the following main functions:
Main system processor, responsible for essential system management
CTM
Routing and control:
Management communication
CPU offload
4 Gb CF (Compact Flash) card memory (NVM) hardware ready for 8 Gb memory
Stores the platform's software code and configuration data base (on the NVM)
Ethernet intra-platform networking
Hardware ready for L2 (Lite Packet) switching
EMS and LCT management support
Timing to all I/O cards
Announces the active RCP to all Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)
Self BIT
Single or redundant RCP
Activations, including:
LED tests for the entire platform
ACO
HA (High Availability):
Active fabric distribution done immediately
Hardware detection of major fabric card faults and switchover
Card views
General view
Front panel
LEDs
4.2.2 PFM04X
Supported platform
OPT9904X
Description
The PFM04X is an input power filter for the DC voltage connected to the OPT9904X and protects the
equipment from external abnormal voltage connectivity. Each platform has two PFM04X units for
redundancy purposes. It is recommended to connect each to a different power source (unless only one
power source is available). When only one power source is available, it is recommended to connect it to
the two power inputs of both units. In such case, and provided a redundant PFM04X is installed, the
faulty unit can be replaced without affecting traffic.
Functions
The PFM04X performs the following functions:
Input DC voltage filtering (-48 V)
Control and alarms
Provision of maximum power of 2000 W
Reverse polarity protection
Surge protection (2 kV line to line, 4 kV line to ground)
Over-voltage protection
Over-current and short circuit protection
Temperature sensing
Input voltage monitoring
Part of Hold-up capacitors (other capacitors are on the FCM04X)
Power Good indication
Fail indication
Protection mechanism that prevents module extraction while connected to a power source
Card views
General view
Front panel
LEDs
4.2.3 PFM04X_H
Supported platform
OPT9904X
Description
The PFM04X_H is a high-power input power filter for the DC voltage connected to the OPT9904X, and
protects the equipment from external abnormal voltage connectivity. When using the PFM04X_H
module, the platform is configured as an <OPT9904>_H (higher-power) platform, supporting the use of
more high-power-consumption cards, such as the MIO700.
Each platform has two PFM04X_H units for redundancy purposes. It is recommended to connect each
to a different power source (unless only one power source is available). When only one power source is
available, it is recommended to connect it to the two power inputs of both units. In such case, and
provided a redundant PFM04X_H is installed, the faulty unit can be replaced without affecting traffic.
Functions
The PFM04X_H performs the following functions:
Input DC voltage filtering (-48 V)
Control and alarms
Provision of maximum power of 2600 W
Reverse polarity protection
Surge protection (2 kV line to line, 4 kV line to ground)
Over-voltage protection
Over-current and short circuit protection
Temperature sensing
Input voltage monitoring
Part of Hold-up capacitors (other capacitors are on the FCM04X)
Power Good indication
Fail indication
Protection mechanism that prevents module extraction while connected to a power source
Card views
General view
Front panel
4.2.4 FCM04X
Supported platform
OPT9904X
Description
The FCM04X provides cooling air to the system from nine separate fans and is positioned at the right
side of the OPT9904X. Air is drawn in by the fans from the right side of the chassis and pumped out
through the horizontally mounted cards and modules through the left side of the chassis. The fans are
fed through circuits that improve the system's performance and support its redundancy.
The FCM04X includes a controller that controls the operation of the fans. If one of the fans fails, the
remaining ones operate in turbo mode and the fail LED lights until the FCM04X is replaced. If the
operation does not take more than four minutes, the FCM04X can be extracted and replaced without
interrupting the router operation (hot swapping). We recommend preparing the replacement module in
advance and so shortening replacement time to a minimum.
WARNINGS:
Don't leave the OPT9904X platform operating without an FCM04X.
If you must replace an FCM04X, don't leave the system without an FCM unit for
more than 2 minutes.
Functions
Features of the FCM04X include:
Separate power supply for each fan unit
Each adjacent pair of fans have a control of its own:
Multiple speed levels are defined for each pair; see System Specifications for details
The levels are controlled by the active RCP04X via a control bus
Separate psophometric filter with a separate fuse for each fan
Large capacitor with a fuse on the DC supply bus
Parallel dual inrush current circuit with a separate fuse for each circuit
Part of Hold up capacitors (serves the PFM04X)
Card views
General view
Front panel
LEDs
4.2.5 TAMIM04X
Supported platform
OPT9904X
Description
The TAMIM04X is the timing, alarms, and management connection unit between the OPT9904X
platform and the external world. It provides interfaces for timing, alarms and the external management.
The TAMIM04X is installed at the upper part of the OPT9904X.
Functions
The TAMIM04X provides the following main functions:
Out-of-band management interface for connecting an STMS
Two management ports for cascading up to two OPT96xx platforms
Timing interfaces:
Two BITS (T3/T4) connectors
1588v2/PTP (ToD, 1PPS) in/out connectors
10 MHz clock In/Out connector
Alarm interfaces and indications, including:
Severity alarm outputs (Critical, Major, Minor)
External alarm outputs and inputs to client or:
4 output alarms (relay dry contacts)
4 input alarms (opto-couplers)
LEDs for displaying the operation and alarms of the system
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
Marking Connector Functions
ALARMS 36-pin SCSI Connects alarm input and output lines via a RAP or
connector directly to the client.
BITS (T3/T4) 1 RJ-45 connector Main timing input/output clock using an E1/2MHz/1.5MHz
signal (for future support).
BITS (T3/T4) 2 RJ-45 connector Additional timing input/output clock using an
E1/2MHz/1.5MHz signal (for future support).
ToD & 1PPS RJ-45 connector Time of Day and 1PPS input/output signals for supporting
Ethernet timing per IEEE 1588v2 standard (for future
support).
MULTI SHELF MNG. 1, RJ-45 connectors Management interfaces for multi-shelf control.
2
IMG RJ-45 connector Out-of-band management Ethernet interface
(10/100/1000BaseT) for connecting to an element
management station (STMS) or a CLI terminal.
1PPS OUT DIN 1.0/2.3 1PPS output signal for supporting Ethernet timing per
connector IEEE 1588v2 standard (for future support).
10 MHz IN/OUT DIN 1.0/2.3 10 MHz input/output signals for supporting Ethernet
connector timing per IEEE 1588v2 standard (for future support).
LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
ACT Green LED On -
1. During upload time
2. xTAM is Active and no BIT failure
Off - TAMIM04X has BIT failure
FL Red LED On -
1. During upload time
2. TAMIM04X has BIT failure
Off - no BIT failure
System Severity Alarm LEDs
MIN Yellow LED On - System has a Minor Alarm
Off -
1. During upload time
2. no Alarms
MAJ Orange LED On - System has a Major Alarm
Off -
1. During upload time
2. no Alarms
CRT Red LED On - System has a Critical Alarm
Off -
1. During upload time
2. no Alarms
4.4 MIO200/MIO200EN
Supported platform
OPT9904X
Description
MIO200 is a multipurpose ODU-XC base card with 100G CFP based uplink interface and up to 12 x
SFP/SFP+ based client ports. The card also supports packet switching over OTN and 200G bandwidth.
The card throughput is 200 Gbps, and four cards together comprise a 800G mesh cross-connect,
without the need for a central matrix. MIO200 is a multi-rate IO card and supports 100G, 10G, and 1G
clients.
The OPT9904X equipped with MIO200 cards provides a multi-service, low cost, minimal size sub 1T
ODU-XC solution to customers for grooming 10G and sub 10G services over the OTN DWDM
networks.
The MIO200 works with D-CFP coherent line transceivers that enable transmission of 100Gbps DP-
QPSK modulation, with Flex-Grid capabilities. This transceiver includes a coherent receiver, DSP
processing, and soft decision forward error correction, for superior noise tolerance, as well as an
exceptional ability to mitigate CD and PMD impairments.
MIO200EN
The MIO200 card is also available with an encryption option. When configured as an MIO200EN,
encryption is supported for OTU4 rates on the line ports. Authentication is via private/public keys, with
the key period configured per NE.
Functions
The MIO200 is a double-slot long card that provides the following main features:
CFP line interface supporting ETY100G and OTU4
12 x SFP/SFP+ based client ports, software-configurable to support any mix of the following
services:
GbE (optical and electrical)
10GE
FC1G
FC2G
FC4G
FC8G
FC16G
STM-1/OC-3
STM-4/OC-12
STM-16/OC-48
STM-64/OC-192
OTU2
OTU2e
Client Ports 1 to 4 support SFP+ transceivers only
Client Ports 5 to 12 support SFP or SFP+ transceivers
800G ODU-XC capacity
ODU0 granularity
High port density
Supports SD-FEC for coherent CFP and FEC for non-coherent CFP
All services (SDH/SONET, FC, Ethernet) are supported with full transparency, including timing
and OH
SNCP for ODU0/1/2/2e and ODU-flex services
Support port protection in ODU-XC configuration using splitters and couplers
Pluggable client and line interfaces support in service upgrade
Standard SC-FEC for 100Gbps line rate interoperability (supported OTR200_CFO modules)
GCC features:
GCC interoperability with the following cards:
HIO500
TR200_2
TM200EN
TM400 (100G mode)
GCC supported in standard (full rate) mode.
Up to 8 GCC channels for OTU2/OTU2e and 1 GCC channel for OTU4 supported.
One GCC supported per port, configurable to either GCC0, GCC1, or GCC2, user selectable.
Card views
General view
Front panel
NOTE: Several limitations apply when configuring MIO200 ports to specific rates. These
limitations are described in the following table. Yes in the table indicates the allowed
(supported) configuration option.
Rate
OC192, STM64,
ETY10G, FC8G, X X X X X X X X X X
FC10G
FC16G X X X X
STM16, OC48, STM1,
OC3, STM4, OC12, X X X X X X X X
FC1G, FC2G, ETY1G
FC4G
X X X X X X X X
(up to 4 ports)
The marking above each port identifies the Transmit (Tx) and Receive signals (Rx). The client port
LEDs are at the middle of the card. Each port has two LEDs: Tx and F/L, and can be identified
according to the number between the pair.
LEDs
4.5 MIO700
The MIO700 is a Gen2 mini-OTN module, providing 2 x 100G/200G or 1 x 300G/400G coherent
uplinks. Each MIO700 card supports up to a total of 400G uplink capacity on the line side and up to
300G capacity on the client side, with ODU-Flex granularity. The MIO700 can be configured with a
digital CFP2 optical module, supporting dual rates of 100GBE/OTU4, for distances up to 80km (70km
between CFP2 and QSFP28).
The OPT9904X platform can be configured with up to 4 MIO700 cards, supporting up to 8 x 200G or 4 x
400G interfaces. The MIO700 is fully interoperable with the OPT99xx and OPT96xx platforms.
NOTES:
The MIO700 requires installation of the higher-power PFM04X_H power supply, in which
case the platform is configured as an OPT9904X_H.
Mixtures of MIO700 and MIO200 cards configured in the same platform are not allowed.
In the current version, the maximum supported bandwidth for the MIO700 is 660G. 400G is
reserved for the lines ports (0, 1). 260G is available for the for the rest of the (client) ports.
Port 0 supports OTU4, OTUC2, and OTUC4. If Port 0 is configured to OTUC4, then Port 1
is not assignable (since the maximum bandwidth of Port 0 and Port 1 together is 400G).
Port 1 supports OTU4 and OTUC2.
Line ports 0 and 1 support 1 GCC channel per port, up to OTUC2/OTU4 rate, software
configurable
Client port 2 supports 1 OTU4 GCC channel
Maximum of 2 OTUC2/OTU4 GCC channels per card
Maximum of 4 OTU2/OTU2e GCC channels per card
Standard SC-FEC for 100Gbps line rate interoperability (supported OTR200_CFO modules)
Card views
General view
Front panel
The line ports are numbered 0 and 1. The numbering of the client ports is from 2 to 7.
NOTE: Several limitations apply when configuring MIO700 ports to specific rates. These
limitations are described in this section. Yes in the following table indicates an allowed
(supported) configuration option.
STM64/
Port Transceiver OTUC4 OTUC2 OTU4 OTU/OTU2e ETY100G ETY40G ETY10GOC OC192
4 3 Yes
5 3 Yes
6 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
7 4 Yes Yes Yes
8 4 Yes Yes Yes
9 4 Yes Yes Yes
10 5 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
11 5 Yes Yes Yes
12 5 Yes Yes Yes
13 5 Yes Yes Yes
14 6 Yes Yes Yes Yes
15 6 Yes Yes Yes
16 6 Yes Yes Yes
17 6 Yes Yes Yes
18 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes
19 7 Yes Yes Yes
20 7 Yes Yes Yes
21 7 Yes Yes Yes
22 8 Yes Yes Yes
23 8 Yes Yes Yes
24 8 Yes Yes Yes
25 8 Yes Yes Yes
The marking above each port identifies the Transmit (Tx) and Receive signals (Rx). The client port
LEDs are at the middle of the card. Each port has two LEDs: Tx and F/L, and can be identified
according to the number between the pair.
LEDs
Usage guidelines
All installation instructions, technical specifications, restrictions, and safety warnings are provided
in the Apollo Platform Installation and Maintenance Manuals. See these manuals for specific
instructions before beginning any Apollo installation.
Contact Ribbon customer support for help configuring specific traffic flows, with the appropriate
GCC communication, protection, and encryption mechanisms in place.
5.2.1 PFM01X_DC/PFM01X_AC
Supported platform
OPT9901X
Description
The PFM01X_DC and PFM01X_AC are input power supplies for the OPT9901X, protecting the
equipment from external abnormal voltage connectivity. Each platform has two power supply units for
redundancy purposes. It is recommended to connect each to a different power source (unless only one
power source is available). When only one power source is available, it is recommended to connect it to
the two power inputs of both units. In such case, and provided a redundant power supply is installed,
the faulty unit can be replaced without affecting traffic.
Functions
The power supply units perform the following functions:
PFM01X_DC: Input DC voltage (-48 V)
PFM01X_AC: Input AC voltage (110/120V AC)
Provision of maximum power of 250 W
Reverse polarity protection (PFM01X_DC)
Surge protection (1KV line to line, 2KV line to ground)
Over-voltage protection
Over-current and short circuit protection
Part of hold-up capacitors
Power Good indication
Fail indication
Module views
PFM01X_DC front panel
PFM01X_DC module
PFM01X_AC module
5.2.2 FCM01X
Supported platform
OPT9901X
Description
The FCM01X provides cooling air to the system from five separate fans, positioned at the right side of
the OPT9901X. Air is drawn in by the fans from the right side of the chassis and pumped out through
the left side of the chassis. The fans are fed through control circuits that improve the system's
performance and support its redundancy.
The FCM01X includes a controller that controls the operation of the fans. If one of the fans fails, the
remaining ones operate in turbo mode and the Fail LED lights in red until the FCM01X is replaced.
If the operation does not take more than two minutes, the FCM01X can be extracted and replaced
without interrupting system operation (hot swapping). We recommend preparing the replacement
module in advance and so shortening replacement time to a minimum.
WARNINGS:
Don't leave the OPT9901X platform operating without an FCM01X.
If you must replace an FCM01X, don't leave the system without an FCM unit for
more than 2 minutes.
Functions
Features of the FCM01X include:
Each adjacent pair of fans has a PWM control of its own:
PWM speed control levels are defined for all 5 fans; see System Specifications for details
The levels are controlled by the built-in controller unit via a control bus
LED status indicators:
Green LED indicates all fans are working properly
Red LED indicates a fan failure
External alarm outputs and inputs:
4 output alarms (relay dry contacts)
4 input alarms (opto-couplers)
Card views
Front panel
General view
STM-64
SONET OC-3/12/48
OC-192
FC100/200/400
FC
FC800/1200/1600
OTNx OTU2e Yes Yes
OTU2 Yes Yes
OTU2ch Yes
OTU4 Yes
Platform layout
Slot allocation
The OPT9624 also includes fiber management areas to help neatly route cables, and fibers connected
to the platform and one slot for an air filter located at the bottom.
The controller subsystem enables easy software upgrades using a remote software procedure operated
from the STMS® management system. It can store several different software versions at the same time
and enables quick switchover between the different versions when required.
Communications module
All OPT96xx platform configurations work with a communications module, featuring:
Electrical interface connectors that are integrated into the I/O modules, eliminating the need for
separate electrical interface modules
Easy routing of external management interfaces
A monitoring system for acceptance test purposes
Hot insertion of cards and modules to support quick maintenance and repair activities, without
affecting traffic
Unidirectional XCs
Bidirectional XCs
Connectivity types
Apollo supports the following XC connectivity types:
One way unprotected, implemented through one of the following options:
Option 1: The XC is from one tributary/L1 interface in an input port to an equal (in bandwidth)
tributary/L1 interface in an output port. The corresponding tributaries/L1 interface in the
opposite direction can be used for a different XC. This option is shown in the following figure.
P2P one-way XC
Option2: A tributary/L1 interface on an input port can be connected to more than one
tributary/L1 interface in output ports. We can use such a connectivity type for multicast
applications, broadcast applications, drop-and-continue, etc. This option is shown in the
following figure.
P2MP one-way XC
Two way unprotected, from one tributary/L1 interface in an input port to an equal (in BW) output
port, and vice versa.
P2P 2-way XC
One way protected, where the output port is protected by two input ports that are unidirectional.
Two way protected, where the input port is protected by two output ports. This is also called Sub-
Network Connection Protection (SNCP). When such an XC is applied inside a card, it is also
called a YP (Y-protection) XC.
2-way protected XC
Two way fully protected, where the XC comprises 4 x 2-way protected ports. The traffic is
protected against more than a single failure.
SNCP N bidirectional XC: This XC has all alternative paths used to protect a line port. Since
there is more than one protecting leg, the operator must specify which leg is the main. The XC
consists of N legs that such an XC can have.
Protection Group: The user can create a protection group that includes several Deg-n ports
(user selection). One of the Deg-n ports is the default active port connected to the line port. In
case of a defect in the active port, the line port switches to the other Deg-n port in the protection
group, and if this port is also in a fail state, it switches to the next one in the protection group.
SCNP N bidirectional XC
Apollo supports both Generic and Enhanced Forward Error Correction (GFEC/EFEC) compliant with
G.709. This increases maximum span length, reducing the need for regeneration sites and enabling
more ROADM nodes to be deployed along the signal path without 3R regeneration.
Similar to SDH/SONET, OTN is a simple technology to operate, with uncompromisingly strong OAM&P
capabilities. OTN also enjoys an advantage over SDH/SONET since it was designed to be
"DWDM-friendly". In addition, the OTN is not synchronized to a common clock source. Hence, OTN is
capable of carrying different services, providing full transparency for both overhead and timing.
With a full range of fixed and variable gain amplifiers, Apollo networks can be designed, simulated, and
implemented for distances greater than 2500 km (1550 miles). Apollo also provides highly cost-effective
solutions based on Raman amplifiers for repeaterless applications such as undersea implementations
of up to 400 km (250 miles).
Optical Network Control Parameters (ONCP) software continuously ensures network resiliency,
automatically monitoring and adjusting to changes in optical power induced by variations in span loss
and/or in the number of active channels, while ignoring fiber cuts and maintenance actions as well as
providing comprehensive status and history information. In addition to reducing OPEX, improves
service reliability, enabling an agile response to customer expansion that can ultimately increase
revenue.
Point-to-point topology
A basic point-to-point topology is a connection between two terminal multiplexers (TM), without
protection. The link requires two fibers.
Point-to-point topology
If you want to add protection, then an additional set of fibers, which can be implemented using OMSP
cards, can be used for protection.
Ring topology
A ring topology links multiple Apollo platforms into a circle. The links require two fibers. The Apollo
platforms act as OTN ADM add/drop multiplexers, with SNC-N protection.
Ring topology
If you want to add protection for critical segments, then an additional set of fibers can be used, so there
are four fibers on those segments.
Multi-ring topology
A multi-ring topology consists of several rings that interconnect at one or more nodes. The main ring
thus provides connectivity between the secondary rings. Applications include metro and resilient
backhaul networks. When a secondary ring joins the main ring at two different nodes, it can provide
additional protection paths. Protection is generally provided through ODU DNI or DRI mechanisms.
Multi-ring topology
Mesh topology
The mesh topology consists of nodes interconnected by many point-to-point links. This provides dense
connectivity between the nodes. Any desired segment may be protected using SNC-N or ASON
GMPLS.
Note: The border between multi-ring and mesh topologies is often blurred. For example,
the network shown in the following figure could easily be redrawn as a complex set of
interconnected rings. Mesh topology also includes star topologies, since stars are simply
subset variations of a complete mesh structure.
Mesh topology
Power distribution
Both connectors in the PFM module must be connected for power to be supplied to the whole platform.
Additional features of the power subsystem include:
Reverse polarity protection
Surge protection (2 kV line to line, 4 kV line to ground)
Over-voltage protection
Over-current and short circuit protection
Redundancy and current sharing between PFM units
Power fail detection + up to 10 msec holdup
Under-voltage detection
Lightning strike protection
7.1 RCP
The RCP card is the central control component in the OPT9624 system architecture, providing the main
system processor responsible for essential system management and timing control. Two RCP modules
must be installed in the platform for redundancy.
RCP cards enable comprehensive management communication functionality with dynamic OSPF
routing. These cards are responsible for communications with external NEs and network management
(STMS) communication. RCP cards can be configured for 1:1 redundancy. All connectivity from the
RCP to any card is kept redundant via the dedicated internal communication links.
The OPT9624 offers two different RCP options, RCP24_T and RCP24_O.
Description
The RCP24_T is the central control component in the OPT9624 system. It supports the following
management and alarm interfaces and functions:
Main system processor, responsible for essential system management.
Serial RS232 interface for local CLI connection.
Terminal Ethernet management interface port supporting 100 Mbps.
Operation and alarm LEDs.
Active CTM.
Two RCP24_T modules may be installed in an OPT9624 platform for redundancy.
The Apollo product line relies on a highly scalable, internet-class routing engine designed specifically to
interoperate seamlessly with current IP backbones. As the main platform controller, the RCP runs the
system software and a full suite of routing protocols, including BGP, OSPF-TE, IS-IS-TE, and RIPv2, as
well as MPLS signaling (RSVP-TE, LDP), MPLS-TP, and multicast (PIM-SM, MBGP, IGMPv2).
The Apollo product line has an efficient modular design that is expressed in every aspect of the system.
This design works well with all the different line cards, offering the same top quality features and
benefits across all types of interfaces. Technology reuse also means a shorter time to market for later
follow on’ cards.
Functions
The RCP24_T provides the following main functions:
Routing and control:
Management communication
CPU offload
8 Gb SD card memory (NVM)
Stores the platform's software code and configuration data base (on the NVM)
Ethernet intra-platform networking
EMS and LCT management support
Timing to all I/O cards
Announces the active RCP to all Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)
Announces the active fabric(s) to all FRUs
Self BIT
Single or redundant RCP
HA (High Availability):
Active fabric distribution done immediately
Hardware detection of major fabric card faults and switchover
Card views
General view
Front panel
LEDs
Ports
Description
The RCP24_O is an RCP card optimized for pure optical DWDM applications. The RCP24_O module
includes all the functionality of the standard RCP24_T except for the CTM module, which is not relevant
for pure optical configurations.
The RCP24_O is the central control component in the OPT9624 system architecture, providing the
main system processor responsible for essential system management and control. Two RCP modules
may be installed in the platform for redundancy. The RCP24_O supports the following management
and alarm interfaces and functions:
Main system processor, responsible for essential system management.
Serial RS232 interface for local CLI connection.
Terminal Ethernet management interface port supporting 100/1000 Mbps.
Two management Ethernet ports for connections to subtending platforms used in multiplatform
configurations (future function).
Operation and alarm LEDs.
Two RCP24_O modules may be installed in an OPT9624 platform for redundancy.
The Apollo product line relies on a highly scalable, internet-class routing engine designed specifically to
interoperate seamlessly with current IP backbones. As the main platform controller, the RCP runs the
system software and a full suite of routing protocols, including BGP, OSPF-TE, IS-IS-TE, and RIPv2, as
well as MPLS signaling (RSVP-TE, LDP), MPLS-TP, and multicast (PIM-SM, MBGP, IGMPv2).
The Apollo product line has an efficient modular design that is expressed in every aspect of the system.
This design works well with all the different line cards, offering the same top quality features and
benefits across all types of interfaces. Technology reuse also means a shorter time to market for later
follow on cards.
Functions
The RCP24_O provides the following main functions:
Routing and control:
Management communication
CPU offload
8 Gb SD card memory (NVM)
Stores the platform's software code and configuration data base (on the NVM)
Ethernet intra-platform networking
Multi-platform infrastructure (future)
EMS and LCT management support
Announces the active RCP to all Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)
Self BIT
Single or redundant RCP
HA (High Availability)
Card views
General view
Front panel
LEDs
Ports
7.2 PFM24
Supported platform
OPT9624
Description
OPT96xx platforms feature a distributed fully redundant power feed subsystem. Two different power
sources (Source A and Source B) feed the xPFMs. The two redundant PFM modules filter and
distribute the -48 VDC nominal battery plant inputs to all internal cards through fully redundant power
buses. Each card generates its own local voltage using high quality DC/DC converters. This distributed
power concept assures system upgrading and efficient heat distribution. It also ensures maximum
reliability of the power feed subsystem.
Power distribution
IMPORTANT: Even if only one power source is used, both input power feed ports should
be connected to the power source with standard cables.
Functions
The PFM24 performs the following functions:
Dual independent DC voltage input filters (-48 V)
Control and alarms for each input
Provision of maximum power of 3500 W
Temperature sensing
Input voltage monitoring
Two DC power input connectors
Power Good indication
Fail indication
Card views
General view
LEDs
Marking Item Functions
POWER ON Green LED Lights steadily when the PFM24 input supply voltage through the
1 POWER IN 1 connector is in the allowed range.
POWER ON Green LED Lights steadily when the PFM24 input supply voltage through the
2 POWER IN 2 connector is in the allowed range.
FAIL Red LED Normally off. Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the unit.
Connectors
Marking Connector Functions
POWER IN 1 5W5 D-type connector Connects DC input power to the first filter in the unit.
POWER IN 2 5W5 D-type connector Connects DC input power to the second filter in the unit.
7.3 CEM24
Supported platform
OPT9624
Description
The CEM24 module is connected to both RCP cards and provides a physical interface between the
OPT9624 platform and the external management, alarms, and clock devices. The CEM24 is the
connection unit between the OPT9624 and the external world. It provides interfaces to management,
timing, and alarms. The CEM24 is installed at the middle top of OPT9624 between the two PFM24 filter
modules.
Functions
The CEM24 provides the following main functions and interfaces:
In-band management Ethernet port supporting 100 Mbps, connected to STMS
Timing and synchronization inputs and outputs, including:
E1/T1
2MHz (BITS1/BITS2) (future)
Pulse-per-second (1 PPS) (future)
Time of Day (ToD) (future)
Alarm interfaces and indications, including:
Alarm severity LEDS (Critical, Major, Minor)
External alarm outputs and inputs to client or RAP
Operation LEDs displaying system operation and alarms
Activations, including:
LED tests for the entire platform
Alarm Cut Off (ACO)
Card views
General view
LEDs
7.4 FCM24
Supported platform
OPT9624
Description
The FCM24 fan control module, installed at the lower edge of the platform, includes 10 separate and
independent fans for secured resiliency. In case one or more of the fans fails, the rest increase the
ventilation speed to compensate. Air is drawn in from the lower part of the chassis and pumped through
the vertically mounted cards through the top of the chassis. The fans are fed through circuits that
improve the system's performance and support its redundancy.
Functions
Features of the FCM24 include:
Separate power supply for each fan unit
Each adjacent pair of fans has a control of its own:
Multiple speed levels are defined for each pair; see System Specifications for details
The levels are controlled by the active RCP24_T via a control bus
Separate psophometric filter with a separate fuse for each fan
Large capacitor with a fuse on the DC supply bus
Parallel dual inrush current circuit with a separate fuse for each circuit
Hold up capacitors (serves the PFM24)
A controller in the active RCP24_T controls the fans operation. If one of the fans fails, the remaining
start to operate in turbo mode, and the fail LED lights until the FCU is replaced. If done in a few
minutes, the FCU can be extracted and replaced without interrupting the OPT9624 operation (hot
swapping).
WARNING: Do not leave the system without an FCU unit for more than a couple of
minutes.
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
NOTE: The low density filter (10 PPI) must be ordered separately.
In extremely dusty sites or when NEBS compliance is required, the 45 PPI filter is suitable. For all other
sites, the 10 PPI filter is preferred.
NOTE: The insertion of the air filter into the OPT9624 activates a switch that reports its
presence to the system management. If an air filter is not installed, a "filter missing" alarm
is generated and reported.
Filter maintenance intervals must strictly be observed. These are application-specific and depend on
the environmental conditions. Clean or replace loaded filters. It is accepted for electronic equipment
design to recommend cleaning/replacing air filters every three months. The high density air filter (45
PPI) may become blocked in a shorter time and must be maintained more frequently.
CAUTION: After maintaining an air filter, carefully examine the material. If holes or tears
are detected, replace with a new filter.
7.5 FM1000
Supported platform
OPT9624
Description
FM1000 is a universal fabric switching matrix for the OPT9624 that provides up to 1 Tbps of ODU cross
connect, Ethernet Layer 2/MPLS packet switching, or any combination thereof OPT9624 is equipped
with four fabric cards working in 3:1 protection scheme. The cards are installed in four dedicated slots in
the middle of the platform. Each I/O card is directly connected to all four fabric cards. In case of fabric
card failure, the I/O interface cards switch to the fourth card within less than 50 msec.
The dedicated slots for the FM1000 in the OPT9624 are 8, 9, 10, and 11, as shown in the following
figure. The rest of the 20 slots can be populated with various optical, service, or data I/O cards.
Functions
The FM1000 provides the following main functions:
Total capacity of 1 Tbps
20 slots for I/O cards with 50 Gbps per slot
Unified fabric for OTN and data applications
FM1000 protection in 3:1 protection scheme with three active and one standby card
1 Tbps traffic evenly divided between the three active FM1000 cards
Each line card configured to work towards the fabric in either OTN or data mode
Each ODUk container carrying its own timing
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
Front panel indicator functions
8.1 RCP08_O
Supported platform
OPT9608
Description
The RCP08_O is an RCP card optimized for pure optical applications. The card is the central control
component in the OPT9608 system architecture, providing the main system processor responsible for
essential system management. Two RCP modules may be installed in the platform for redundancy.
Two RCP08_O modules may be installed in an OPT9608 platform for redundancy.
The Apollo product line relies on a highly scalable, internet-class routing engine designed specifically to
interoperate seamlessly with current IP backbones. As the main platform controller, the RCP runs the
system software and a full suite of routing protocols, including BGP, OSPF-TE, IS-IS-TE, and RIPv2, as
well as MPLS signaling (RSVP-TE, LDP), MPLS-TP, and multicast (PIM-SM, MBGP, IGMPv2).
The Apollo product line has an efficient modular design that is expressed in every aspect of the system.
This design works well with all the different line cards, offering the same top quality features and
benefits across all types of interfaces. Technology reuse also means a shorter time to market for later
follow on cards.
Functions
The RCP08_O supports the following management and alarm interfaces and functions:
Main system processor, responsible for essential system management.
Serial RS232 interface for local CLI connection.
Terminal Ethernet management interface port supporting 100 Mbps.
Two management Ethernet ports for connections to subtending platforms used in multiplatform
configurations (future function).
Operation and alarm LEDs.
The RCP08_O provides the following main functions:
Routing and control:
Management communication
CPU offload
8 Gb SD card memory (NVM)
Stores the platform's software code and configuration data base (on the NVM)
Ethernet intra-platform networking
Multi-platform infrastructure (future)
EMS and LCT management support
Card views
General view
Front panel
LEDs
Marking Item Functions
ACT Green LED Lights together with the STBY and FAIL LEDs during software
download. Lights steadily when the RCP is configured as the
active card. Off when the RCP has a failure or is configured as
the standby card.
STBY Yellow LED Lights together with the ACT and FAIL LEDs during software
download. Lights steadily when the RCP is configured as the
stand-by card. Off when the RCP is the active card.
FAIL Red LED Lights together with the ACT and STBY LEDs during software
download. Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card.
Off when there is no fault in the RCP.
CRT. Red LED Lights when the highest severity unacknowledged alarm in the
platform is critical.
8.2 RCP1_4AD_T
Supported platform
OPT9608
Description
The RCP1_4AD_T card is the central control component in the OPT9608 system architecture, providing
the main system processor responsible for essential system management and timing control. Two
RCP1_4AD_T modules may be installed in an OPT9608 platform for redundancy.
The Apollo product line relies on a highly scalable, internet-class routing engine designed specifically to
interoperate seamlessly with current IP backbones. As the main platform controller, the RCP runs the
system software and a full suite of routing protocols, including BGP, OSPF-TE, IS-IS-TE, and RIPv2, as
well as MPLS signaling (RSVP-TE, LDP), MPLS-TP, and multicast (PIM-SM, MBGP, IGMPv2).
The Apollo product line has an efficient modular design that is expressed in every aspect of the system.
This design works well with all the different line cards, offering the same top quality features and
benefits across all types of interfaces. Technology reuse also means a shorter time to market for later
follow on cards.
The RCP1_4AD_T supports the following management and alarm interfaces and functions:
Main system processor, responsible for essential system management.
Serial RS232 interface for local CLI connection.
Terminal Ethernet management interface port supporting 100 Mbps.
Two management Ethernet ports for connections to subtending platforms used in multiplatform
configurations (future function).
Operation and alarm LEDs.
Active CTM.
Functions
Routing and control:
Management communication
CPU offload
8 Gb CF (Compact Flash) card memory (NVM)
Stores the platform's software code and configuration data base (on the NVM)
Ethernet intra-platform networking
Multi-platform infrastructure (future)
EMS and LCT management support
Timing to all I/O cards
Announces the active RCP to all Field Replaceable Units (FRUs)
Self BIT
Single or redundant RCP
HA (High Availability):
Active fabric distribution done immediately
Hardware detection of major fabric card faults and switchover
Card views
General view
Front panel
LEDs
8.3 PFM08_AC
Supported platform
OPT9608
Description
The PFM08_AC is an AC to DC power converter that supplies 48 VDC to the OPT9608 platform. The
unit occupies one PFM slot in the OPT9608. While a single card can provide the total power required by
the OPT9608, AC power redundancy is supported by installing two PFM08_AC cards in the platform.
To support the full redundancy, each PFM08_AC must be fed from a different AC source. You can also
install a mixture of one PFM08_AC module and one PFM module (DC, with or without circuit breaker).
The AC input voltage plug on this card has a special front cover that protects it against unintended
disconnection. After inserting the AC plug, the cover is lifted on the plug and the captive screw is
fastened, to protect the AC plug from removal.
CAUTION: To protect the PFM08_AC against lightning (up to 4 Kv) Line to protected
Ground, the customer must add the following components on the AC power source feeding
the card:
Surge protection varistors between Line to Neutral
Surge arrestors between Line to Ground
WARNING: Before connecting the PFM08_AC to power, make sure that the 230 VAC
source is protected by an 8A circuit breaker, or if you are using 110 VAC source, by a 16A
circuit breaker.
Functions
The PFM08_AC provides the following main functions:
Wide AC input voltage range from 110 VAC to 230 VAC (50/60 Hz)
Output voltage ranging from 52 VDC to 55 VDC, with up to 650 W of power
Input and output voltage filters
Hot swappable card
Control and alarms
Temperature sensing
Redundancy
DC output voltage indication
Fail indication
Card views
General view
Front panel
LEDs
Connectors
Description
The PFM serves as an input power filter for the DC voltage connected to the OPT9608, and provides
the alarm interfaces for the platform. Each platform has two PFM units for redundancy purposes. To
support full redundancy, each PFM should be fed from a different power source, if available. When only
one power source is available, it should be connected to both units. The PFM can then be replaced
without affecting traffic. The standard PFM module for the OPT9608 platform is available either with or
without a circuit breaker. A mix of both types is allowed in the same platform. You can also install a
mixture of one PFM08_AC module and one PFM module (DC, with or without circuit breaker).
Functions
Input DC voltage filtering (range from -40.8 VDC to -57.6 VDC)
Control and alarms
Temperature sensing
Input voltage monitoring
Circuit breaker on the module's front panel used as an ON/OFF switch for the platform and over-
current protection for the DC power source
Hold-up capacitors
Power Good indication
Fail indication
Simple protection mechanism that prevents module extraction while connected to a power source
Card views
General view with circuit breaker
LEDs
Connectors
Description
The PFM serves as an input power filter for the DC voltage connected to the OPT9608, and provides
the alarm interfaces for the platform. Each platform has two PFM units for redundancy purposes. To
support full redundancy, each PFM should be fed from a different power source, if available. When only
one power source is available, it should be connected to both units. The PFM can then be replaced
without affecting traffic. The standard PFM module for the OPT9608 platform is available either with or
without a circuit breaker. A mix of both types is allowed in the same platform. You can also install a
mixture of one PFM08_AC module and one PFM module (DC, with or without circuit breaker).
Functions
The PFM performs the following functions:
Input DC voltage filtering (range from -40.8 VDC to -57.6 VDC)
Control and alarms
Temperature sensing
Input voltage monitoring
Hold-up capacitors
Power Good indication
Fail indication
Simple protection mechanism that prevents module extraction while connected to a power source
Card views
General view without circuit breaker
Front panel
LEDs
Connectors
8.6 PFM08H_DC
Supported platform
OPT9608
Description
The PFM08H_DC serves as a high-power input power filter for the DC voltage connected to the
OPT9608, and provides the alarm interfaces for the platform. When using the PFM08H_DC module, the
platform is configured as an OPT9608H (higher-power) platform, supporting the use of more high-
power components, such as the higher-capacity I/O modules.
Each platform has two PFM08H_DC units for redundancy purposes. To support full redundancy, each
PFM should be fed from a different power source, if available. When only one power source is
available, it should be connected to both units. The PFM08H_DC can then be replaced without affecting
traffic. The PFM08H_DC supplies up to 1800W of power, a higher amount than the standard PFM
module, and therefore cannot be installed in combination with a different type of PFM module. When
working with the PFM08H_DC, the platform must be configured with the corresponding high-powered
FCM08H fan.
Functions
The PFM performs the following functions:
Input DC voltage filtering (range from -40.8 VDC to -57.6 VDC)
Control and alarms
Temperature sensing
Input voltage monitoring
Hold-up capacitors
Power Good indication
Fail indication
Simple protection mechanism that prevents module extraction while connected to a power source
Card views
General view
Front panel
LEDs
Marking Item Functions
ACTIVE Green LED Lights steadily when the PFM receives input power and operates
normally.
FAIL Red LED Normally off. Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the unit.
Connectors
Marking Connector Functions
- 5W5 D-type connector Connects the DC power source to the module.
- Protection lever Activated by the power cable when plugged into the
corresponding connector on the front panel. As a result,
the lever slides a locking pin into the chassis and
prevents extraction of the module.
Description
OPT9608 platforms operating in extremely dusty and/or humid environments must be equipped with an
air filter in the dedicated slot on the right side of the FCM/FCM08_S.
The purpose of the air filter is to reduce the accumulation of dust and dirt carried by the cooling air
flowing through the platform on its internal components. The combination of dust and humidity produces
a capacitive/conductive layer between components installed on cards and modules. This may degrade
equipment performance or even cause malfunctions. Moreover, the insulating effect of a dust layer
causes components to operate at higher temperatures, so ultimately decreasing equipment reliability.
An air filter reduces dirt accumulation and thus prevents degradation of equipment reliability and
performance. However, filters do increase the resistance to airflow and should therefore carefully be
selected according to the actual operating conditions.
Apollo offers two types of air filters:
Low density foam filter, with a density of 10 PPI.
High density foam filter (45 PPI) in compliance with NEBS standards. This is the default type
supplied with the OPT9608.
NOTE: The low density filter (10 PPI) must be ordered separately.
In extremely dusty sites or when NEBS compliance is required, the 45 PPI filter is required. For all other
sites, the 10 PPI filter is sufficient.
NOTE: The insertion of the air filter into the FCM activates a switch that reports its
presence to the system management. If an air filter is not installed, a "filter missing" alarm
is generated and reported.
Filter maintenance intervals must strictly be observed. These are application-specific and depend on
the environmental conditions. Loaded filters are handled by cleaning or replacing. It is accepted for
electronic equipment design to recommend cleaning/replacing air filters every three months. The high
density air filter (45 PPI) may become blocked in a shorter time and must be maintained more
frequently.
8.7.1 FCM
Supported platform
OPT9608
Description
The FCM is positioned at the right side of the OPT9608 platform and provides cooling air to the system
from nine separate fans. Air is drawn in by the fans from the right side of the chassis and pumped out
through the horizontally mounted cards and modules through the left side of the chassis.
The FCM includes a controller that controls the operation of the fans. If one of the fans fails, the
remaining ones operate in turbo mode and the fail LED lights until the FCM is replaced. If the operation
does not take more than four minutes, the FCM can be extracted and replaced without interrupting the
router operation (hot swapping). Apollo recommends preparing the replacement module in advance and
so shortening replacement time to a minimum.
WARNINGS:
Don't leave the OPT9608 platform operating without an FCM.
If you must replace an FCM, don't leave the system without an FCM unit for more than
4 minutes.
Functions
The main functions of the FCM include:
Cooling air for the OPT9608 platform
Controlling the operation of the nine fans according to the ambient temperature and sensors on
the OPT9608 platform
Multiple speed levels are defined for the fans; see System Specifications for details
Supporting hot swapping
Collecting system alarms via the internal ACM:
Four alarm inputs
Four alarm outputs (dry contacts)
Alarm severity : Critical, Major, Minor
Alarm buzzer
Accommodating the air filter for the fans
Supplying -48 VDC power for the fans
Out-of-band management (IMG)
Card views
General view
8.7.2 FCM08_S
Supported platform
OPT9608
Description
The FCM08_S is positioned at the right side of the OPT9608 platform and provides cooling air to the
system from nine separate fans. Air is drawn in by the fans from the right side of the chassis and
pumped out through the horizontally mounted cards and modules through the left side of the chassis.
The FCM08_S includes an integral built-in Layer 2 switch with four ports: one port is for connecting the
OPT9608 to management (IMG port), and three multi-shelf ports to connect to additional Apollo system
management ports at same site.
The FCM08_S includes a controller that controls the operation of the fans. If one of the fans fails, the
remaining ones operate in turbo mode and the fail LED lights until the FCM08_S is replaced. If the
operation does not take more than four minutes, the FCM08_S can be extracted and replaced without
interrupting the router operation (hot swapping). Apollo recommends preparing the replacement module
in advance and so shortening replacement time to a minimum.
WARNINGS:
Don't leave the OPT9608 platform operating without an FCM08_S.
If you must replace an FCM, don't leave the system without an FCM08_S unit for more
than 4 minutes.
Functions
The main functions of the FCM include:
Cooling air for the OPT9608 platform
Controlling the operation of the nine fans according to the ambient temperature and sensors on
the OPT9608 platform
Multiple speed levels are defined for the fans; see System Specifications for details
Supporting hot swapping
Collecting system alarms via the internal ACM:
Four alarm inputs
Four alarm outputs (dry contacts)
Alarm severity : Critical, Major, Minor
Alarm buzzer
Accommodating the air filter for the fans
Supplying -48 VDC power for the fans
Layer 2 switch with four ports:
1 port for connecting the system to management (IMG)
3 ports for connecting to other Apollo systems (multi-shelf MNG)
Usage guidelines
The FCM08_S includes an integral built-in Layer 2 switch with three multi-shelf ports to connect to
additional Apollo system management ports at same site. You can define a cluster configuration with up
to three network elements (Slaves NE1, NE2, NE3) connected to an OPT9608 (Master NE0) through
the MNG ports on the FCU08_S fan unit. A typical example of this topology, illustrated in the following
figure, is explained here.
In this sample topology, the Master NE0 communicates with the management system using GCC
(through NE4). NE4 may be connected to the management through the IMG port, or using GCC as well.
(Other topology options are not described here.)
Card views
General view
Front panel
9.1 RCP03/RCP03R
Supported platform
OPT9603
Description
The RCP03/RCP03R card is the central control component in the OPT9603 system architecture,
providing the main system processor responsible for essential system management and control. The
card has no redundancy, as only one RCP03/RCP03R can be installed in the OPT9603 platform.
NOTE: The RCP03 card has been designated as end of life, and has been replaced by
the RCP03R. The same feature description applies to both cards. The RCP03R is fully
interoperable with the RCP03; there are no restriction on use of the RCP03R.
Functions
The RCP03/RCP03R provides the following main functions:
Control processor for the system
Controls all cards and modules in the platform using Ethernet and I2C busses
Supports Ethernet/IP connectivity between the RCP and all optical cards (OPBs) for GCC, OSC,
and internal communication
Stores the platform's software code and configuration data base on an NVM (SD type, 8 Gb)
Performance monitoring logging
Alarm interfaces and indications, including:
Alarm severity outputs (Critical, Major, Minor)
External alarm outputs and inputs to client or RAP
LEDs for displaying the operation and alarms of the system
Activations, including:
LED tests for the entire platform
ACO
Management and debug interfaces via GbE and RS-232 ports
Card views
General view
Front panel
9.2 PFM03
Supported platform
OPT9603
Description
The PFM03 serves as an input power filter for the DC voltage connected to the OPT9603. Each
platform has two PFM03 units for DC redundancy purposes. It is recommended to connect each to a
different power source (unless only one power source is available). When only one power source is
available, it is recommended to connect it to both units. The PFM03 can then be replaced without
affecting traffic, provided that the second PFM03 is installed and connected to power.
NOTES:
The PFM03 and PFM03_RAC may be installed side by side in the same platform, providing
another redundancy option.
The OPT9603 can also be equipped with a PFM03_AC card. In this case the PFP03_AC
occupies both PFM slots and power redundancy is not supported.
Functions
The PFM03 performs the following functions:
Input DC voltage filtering (-48 V)
Control and alarms
Input voltage monitoring
Hold-up capacitors
Power Good indication
Fail indication
Card views
Front panel
9.3 PFM03_H
Supported platform
OPT9603
Description
The PFM03_H serves as a high-power input power filter for the DC voltage connected to the OPT9603,
and provides the alarm interfaces for the platform. When using the PFM03_H module, the platform is
referred to as an OPT9603H (higher-power) platform, supporting the use of more high-power
components, such as the higher-capacity I/O modules.
Each platform has two PFM03_H units for DC redundancy purposes. To support full redundancy, each
PFM should be fed from a different power source, if available. When only one power source is
available, it should be connected to both units. The PFM03_H can then be replaced without affecting
traffic, provided that the second PFM03_H is installed and connected to power.
The PFM03_H supplies up to 480W of power, a higher amount than the standard PFM module, and
therefore cannot be installed in combination with a different type of PFM module.
Functions
The PFM03_H performs the following functions:
Input DC voltage filtering (-48 V)
Control and alarms
Temperature sensing
Input voltage monitoring
Hold-up capacitors
Power Good indication
Fail indication
Simple protection mechanism that prevents module extraction while connected to a power source
Card views
Front panel
9.4 PFM03_AC
Supported platform
OPT9603
Description
The PFM03_AC is an AC to DC power converter that supplies power to the OPT9603 platform. The unit
occupies the two PFM slots in the OPT9603 and power redundancy is not supported in this option. A
divider bracket, located between the two PFM slots, must be removed to enable the installation of the
PFM03_AC in the OPT9603. The procedure for performing it is described in the OPT9603 Installation
and Maintenance Manual.
Functions
The PFM03_AC provides the following main functions:
Wide AC input voltage range from 110 VAC to 230 VAC
Output voltage of 48 VDC with up to 320 W of power
Input and output voltage filters
Control and alarms
DC output voltage indication
Fail indication
Card views
General view
Front panel
9.5 PFM03_RAC
Supported platform
OPT9603
Description
The PFM03_RAC is an AC to DC power converter that supplies 48 VDC to the OPT9603 platform. The
unit occupies one PFM slot in the OPT9603. AC power redundancy is supported by installing two
PFM03_RAC cards in the platform. To support the redundancy each PFM03_RAC must be fed from a
different AC source. A single card can provide the total power required by the OPT9603.
NOTES: The PFM03 and PFM03_RAC may be installed side by side in the same
platform, providing another redundancy option.
WARNING: Before connecting the PFM03_RAC to power, make sure that the AC source
is protected by a 6A circuit breaker.
Functions
The PFM03_RAC provides the following main functions:
Wide AC input voltage range from 110 VAC to 230 VAC (50/60 Hz)
Output voltage of 48 VDC with up to 320 W of power
Input and output voltage filters
Hot swappable card
Control and alarms
DC output voltage indication
Fail indication
Card views
General view
Front panel
9.6 FCM03
Supported platform
OPT9603
Description
The FCM03 is positioned at the right side of the OPT9603 platform and provides cooling air to the
system from two separate fans. Air is drawn in by the fans from the right side of the chassis and
pumped out through the horizontally mounted cards and modules through the left side of the chassis.
The FCM03 includes a controller that controls the operation of the fans. If one of the fans fails, the
second one operates in turbo mode and the fail LED lights until the FCM03 is replaced. If the operation
does not take more than four minutes, the FCM03 can be extracted and replaced without interrupting
the platform operation (hot swapping). Apollo recommends preparing the replacement module in
advance and so shortening replacement time to a minimum.
WARNINGS:
Don't leave the OPT9603 platform operating without an FCM03.
If you must replace an FCM03, don't leave the system without an FCM03 unit for more
than 4 minutes
Functions
The main functions of the FCM03 include:
Cooling air for the OPT9603 platform
Controlling the operation of the two fans according to the ambient temperature and sensors on the
OPT9603 platform
Multiple speed levels are defined for the fans; see System Specifications for details
Supporting hot swapping
Dual power supply -48 VDC support redundancy
Accommodating the air filter for the fans
Parallel dual inrush current circuit
Psophometric filter
Card views
General view
Front panel
Description
OPT9603 platforms operating in extremely dusty and/or humid environments must be equipped with an
air filter in the dedicated slot on the right side of the FCU.
The purpose of the air filter is to reduce the accumulation of dust and dirt carried by the cooling air
flowing through the platform on its internal components. The combination of dust and humidity produces
a capacitive/conductive layer between components installed on cards and modules. This may degrade
equipment performance or even cause malfunctions. Moreover, the insulating effect of a dust layer
causes components to operate at higher temperatures, so ultimately decreasing equipment reliability.
An air filter reduces dirt accumulation and thus prevents degradation of equipment reliability and
performance. However, filters do increase the resistance to airflow and should therefore carefully be
selected according to the actual operating conditions.
The vendor offers a medium density foam filter, with a density of 25 PPI for the FCM03.
Filter maintenance intervals must strictly be observed. These are application-specific and depend on
the environmental conditions. Loaded filters are handled by cleaning or replacing. It is accepted for
electronic equipment design to recommend cleaning/replacing air filters every three months.
The preceding figure depicts a typical 3-degree ROADM node that sends/receives traffic to/from East,
West, and North. Each line connecting between the ROADMs represents a physical jumper fiber
connection carrying a programmable, flexible spectrum allocation. The ROADM_20CF (CD) and
ROADM_8x24CDCF (CDC) ROADM units operate as add/drop collectors that concentrate the channels
from all directions (East, West, North) and enable extraction of the required ones.
ONCP data include advanced channel and link parameters beyond power, such as OSNR, dispersion,
and other estimated parameters (a combination of measurements and calculations) that can be used to
dynamically monitor and control the network. Note that real time monitoring of channel parameters is
available at the optical trail (OMS and OCH) and port (OCH or OTS) levels.
The result is simplicity, easier network operation, and significant savings of time and money in terms of
real time fault management, since instead of sending a technician to a remote site with expensive
testing equipment, you have complete information and remote control.
Optical data is collected from all active optical components, such as transceivers, amplifiers (photo
diode measurements), and ROADM optical channel monitors, as well as intra-node and inter-node
connectivity. Optical data communicated between sites includes fiber type, fiber loss, amplification
levels, number of channels (maximum and active), channel rate, OSNR, chromatic dispersion, distance,
attenuation, non-linear status, and more. As the measured optical parameters are propagated inside
each site and then transferred between the sites, a network and site topology map is created, reflecting
the information collected.
A proprietary algorithm run through the embedded software at the NE level analyzes the gathered
information and fine-tunes the network for equalization and optimization. ONCP functionality is
supported for alien wavelengths too; just create a UME alien transceiver and define the optical
parameters according to the object specifications.
ONCP calculations are used for:
Automatic gain and power control (APC) for automatic amplifiers and ROADM configuration.
With ONCP, automatic responses to changes in the network, such as fiber attenuation and
channel changes, optimize network efficiency 24/7. This constant automatic tuning is essential for
efficient management of dynamic colorless-directionless networks with WSON restoration, running
high bit rates such as 100 Gbps and 200 Gbps per carrier.
Indicating optical impairments in real time, informing the NOC engineer of all link optical
values, including OSNR, power, dispersion, and non-linear values. ONCP's real time network
analysis gives network operator full remote control. Collecting the necessary optical information in
hand, such as OSNR and Non-Linear status, is always the first step in analyzing network
abnormalities. ONCP provides all this information with high accuracy, in real time - a key factor in
saving precious debugging time. For example, measuring 100 Gbps/200 Gbps OSNR, especially
in ROADM networks, would otherwise require complicated and expensive Optical Spectrum
Analyzers, as well as the time and overhead required for traveling to the relevant sites.
Enhanced path finding for WSON. WSON configuration takes into consideration the optical
values of alternative restoration paths. WSON networks use ONCP data to calculate an optically
validated restoration path, crucial to ensure that restored services will actually be able to maintain
the highest SLA.
ONCPs are generated by the transceivers and transmitted along the network following the optical
transmission path. A port receives and transmits the ONCP from/to the ports to which it is physically
connected (either in the same node or in an adjacent node). Upon receiving the ONCP in an input port,
the card updates the ONCP according to predetermined rules, and transmits the updated ONCP to the
next card via an output port. The following figures illustrate ONCP propagation within a site and
between sites.
Apollo ROADMs are based on Wavelength Selective Switches (WSS) using core technologies like
optical MEMS for fixed grid 50/100GHz MD-ROADMs, and LCOS for flexible grid MD-ROADMs. On the
add side, the ROADMs connect all wavelengths from input to output (line) ports. Operators can
remotely switch or add any wavelength from any input port to any output port at any time. In add
configurations, these ROADMs can connect access rings to the core ring, dropping wavelengths at
remote sites, including star or full mesh topologies. On the drop side, all wavelengths from the input
port are broadcast to all drop ports, optimized for broadcast video applications. The ROADM_20TF,
built around a state-of-the-art 1x20 WSS, employs a route and select architecture using back-to-back
WSS that minimizes insertion loss across the ROADM node. The ROADM8x24_CDCF is a 4-slot
collector ROADM for CDC networks that provides the solution needed for NG contentionless networks,
with support for superchannel transceivers.
MD-ROADM cards support:
Broadcast function.
Full n-degree operation for multiple rings, star, and full mesh topologies.
Cost-effective solution for high channel count.
Full built-in optical channel monitoring (OCM) for all output channels
Superior solution for alien wavelengths fed to Apollo DWDM networks from third party equipment
that supports the ITU-T DWDM grid.
Low insertion loss for through channels.
Advance protection and restoration.
Flexible spectrum at 12.5GHz resolution.
Apollo's cutting-edge colorless, directionless, and contentionless ROADM architecture (CD and CDC
DWDM architecture) with Tunable Filter Array (TFA) modules connected to the local port supplements
WSS ROADM technology to meet operator demands for greater flexibility and enhanced optical
protection options.
Directionless switching enables the ROADM to connect any signal from any direction (“degree”)
or drop port to any other degree without restriction.
Colorless switching enables the ROADM to connect an add/drop port to any wavelength without
restriction.
Contentionless switching means that two or more services can be transmitted from the site in
different directions using the same wavelength channel.
10.4.1 ROADM_20TF
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The ROADM_20TF is a 20 degree double-long-slot ROADM card. The ROADM_20TF supports the
following:
Flex-Grid operation over the extended C-band
96/48 fixed grid channels with 50/100 GHz spacing
DROP and ADD components implemented by two WSS modules
OCM (Optical Channel Monitor) including channel power monitoring
Channels power equalization at the line output port.
Fiber connectivity module, based on an 100 Mbps, 1528 nm SFP enabling verification and
inspection of the fiber-connectivity for the ROADM OTS Degree ports
Optical loopback
WSON operation
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
Port name Number Function
1-20 20 pairs Degree ports with LC connectors
The path-through (input) signal is connected to the IN connector in the
pair and the path-through (output) comes out through the OUT
connector in the pair. The marking OUT and IN near the connectors
identifies the function of each of the corresponding ports. Note: The
function ADD and DROP of each duplex connector in the upper row are
reversed in the lower row.
LINE 1 pair
Line port with LC connector
MON -20dB 1
Monitor port for connection of line monitoring equipment
Usage guidelines
The ROADM_20TF can be used as a line ROADM in any network site.
The ROADM's 20 degree ports can be assigned for either pass-through or add/drop traffic:
Pass-through ports are configured as OTS ports by default.
Add/drop ports are configured as OTS by default; however, they can also be configured as
OHCP ports.
We recommend connecting the OHCP add/drop ports to a transceiver, which enables a
simple colorless direction-aware architecture.
LEDs
Block diagram
10.4.2 ROADM_20CF
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The ROADM_20CF is a double-long-slot field configurable collector card with 20 ports. The ports are
field configured to be either degree or client ports. The ROADM_20CF supports the following:
Field configurable: 4,6, or 8 degree ports with 16, 14, or 12 client ports respectively
Flex-Grid operation over the extended C-band
96/48 fixed grid channels with 50/100 GHz spacing
Fiber connectivity module, based on an 100 Mbps, 1528 nm SFP enabling verification and
inspection of the fiber-connectivity for the ROADM OTS Degree ports
WSON operation
Internal optical loopback of client port
OCM (Optical Channel Monitor) including channel power monitoring
DROP and ADD components implemented by two WSS modules
Colorless directionless applications
Optical power monitoring (via PDs) of degree input ports
Reconfigurable Add/Drop of any desired channel from any degree port to/from any client port
Indirect connection between ROADM site transceivers and the line ROADMs
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
Each port has an input and an output connector. The function of each connector (input or output) varies
according to row and configuration. You must adhere to the port connectivity rules listed in the following
tables.
LEDs
(Ports 1 Red LED Each channel's indicator lights if insufficient power is detected at the
to 8) corresponding Degree (Add) input.
Note: The card includes 8 Degree port LEDs at the bottom of the panel.
These LEDS relate to the ports in the upper row configured as Degree
ports.
Block diagram
Usage guidelines
The main application of the ROADM_20CF is as a collector in Colorless-Directionless network nodes. A
simplified block diagram of this application is shown in the following figure.
ROADM_20CF applications
The node ROADMs, connected to the ROADM_20CF Degree ports can be of different types like:
ROADM_4F, ROADM_9F, ROADM_20TF, etc.
The ROADM_20CF supports several options for connecting to the Client ports, including:
Direct connection of a single Coherent or non-Coherent transceiver to a Client port configured as
OCHP channel.
When the Client port is configured as OTS channel, several Coherent transceivers, can be
connected through a Splitter/Coupler outputs/inputs. This application supports Coherent
transceivers only. In addition the connection of the Splitter/Coupler must be made through an
amplification block to compensates for the Splitter/Coupler attenuation.
Another option to connect several transceivers to a single Client port configured as OTS channel
is through a Mux/DeMux. In this case, the transceivers are 10 G, non-Coherent connected to the
Mux/DeMux ports. The Mux/DeMux is connected to the Client port through an amplification block
that compensates for the Mux/DeMux attenuation.
10.4.3 ROADM_8x24CDCF
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
Description
The ROADM_8x24CDCF is a 4-slot (double-wide and double-long) ROADM card with 8 degree ports
and 24 client ports. The ROADM_8x24CDCF supports the following:
8 degree ports
24 client colorless directionless contentionless (CDC) ports
Flex-Grid operation over the extended C-band
96/48 fixed grid channels with 50/100 GHz spacing
Internal optical loopback
DROP and ADD components implemented by double WSS modules
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
The OUT/IN label near the connectors identifies the function of each of the corresponding ports. The
input signal is connected to the IN (ADD) connector in the pair and the output signal comes out through
the OUT (DROP) connector
Usage guidelines
The most common application of the ROADM_8x24_CDCF module is as a collector for colorless-
directionless-contentionless (CDC) applications.
Ports 1-8 are connected to the degree ports of the site in-line ROADMs.
Ports 9-32 are connected to transceivers directly (OCHP) or via splitters (OTS).
The most common configuration is illustrated in the following figure.
LEDs
Block diagram
10.4.4 ROADM_9TF
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The ROADM_9TF is a 9 degree double-slot ROADM card. The ROADM_9TF supports the following:
Flex-Grid operation over the extended C-band
96/48 fixed grid channels with 50/100 GHz spacing
DROP and ADD components implemented by two WSS modules
OCM (Optical Channel Monitor) including channel power monitoring
Fiber connectivity module, based on an 100 Mbps, 1528 nm SFP enabling verification and
inspection of the fiber-connectivity for the ROADM OTS Degree ports
Internal optical loopback
Power equalization of the channels at the line output
WSON operation
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
Usage guidelines
The most common application of the ROADM_9TF module is as a line ROADM in the network. It is
located at each of the site's ROADM network interfaces. The ROADM_9TF is a twin ROADM module.
This means that both the Add and Drop components are based on WSS technology rather than a
splitter. Therefore, the ROADM_9TF is a more appropriate choice for use in a Route & Select context,
rather than in a Broadcast & Select context (where a ROADM_9F or ROADM_9FS would be a better
choice).
A typical ROADM_9TF network configuration is illustrated in the following figure.
The line port is connected to the transmission fiber (usually via amplifiers), while some of the 9-
degree ports are interconnected (mesh) with any of the other ROADM_9TF devices.
The rest of the degree ports can be connected directly to the transceivers, splitters, Mux/DeMux
devices, or collector degree ports.
LEDs
Block diagram
10.4.5 ROADM_9FS
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The ROADM_9FS is a 9-degree single-slot ROADM card that supports the following:
Flex-Grid operation over the extended C-band
96/48 fixed grid channels with 50/100 GHz spacing
DROP component implemented by a 1 x 9 splitter
ADD component implemented by a WSS module
OCM (Optical Channel Monitor)
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
The path-through (input) signal is connected to the IN connector in the pair and the path-through
(output) comes out through the OUT connector in the pair. The marking OUT and IN near the
connectors identifies the function of each of the corresponding ports.
Usage guidelines
The most common application of the ROADM_9FS module is as a line ROADM in the network. It is
located at each of the site's ROADM network interfaces. The Add component of the ROADM_9FS
module is based on WSS technology and Drop component on splitter. Therefore, the ROADM_9FS is
more appropriate choice for use in a Broadcast & Select context, rather than in Route & Select context
(where ROADM_9TF would be a better choice). A typical ROADM_9FS configuration is illustrated in the
following figure.
The line port is connected to the transmission fiber (usually via amplifiers), while some of the 9
degree ports are interconnected (mesh) with any of the other ROADM_9FS devices.
The rest of the degree ports can be connected directly to the transceivers, splitters, Mux/DeMux
devices, or collector degree ports.
LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed
configurations). Off when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when
there is no fault in the module.
Port LEDs
, LINE and Red LEDs Each channel's indicator lights if insufficient power is detected
DEGREES LOS at the corresponding LINE or DEGREE port input.
(Ports 0 to 9)
Block diagram
ROADM_9FS functional block diagram
10.4.6 ROADM_9F
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The ROADM_9F is a 9-degree double-slot ROADM card that supports the following:
Flex-Grid operation over the extended C-band
96/48 fixed grid channels with 50/100 GHz spacing
DROP component implemented by a 1 x 9 splitter
ADD component implemented by a WSS module
OCM (Optical Channel Monitor)
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
The path-through (input) signal is connected to the ADD connector in the pair and the path-through
(output) comes out through the DROP connector in the pair.
The marking ADD and DROP near the connectors identifies the function of each of the corresponding
ports.
Usage guidelines
The most common application of the ROADM_9F module is as a line ROADM in the network. It is
located at each of the site's ROADM network interfaces. The line port is connected to the
transmission fiber (usually via amplifiers), while some of the 9-degree ports are interconnected
(mesh) with any of the other ROADM_9F devices.
The rest of the degree ports can be connected directly to the transceivers, splitters, Mux/DeMux
devices, or collector degree ports.
LEDs
Block diagram
10.4.7 ROADM_9A50
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
Description
The ROADM_9A50 is a 9-degree double-wide slot ROADM card that supports the following:
88 channels with 50 GHz spacing in the C band
Compatible with all 10 Gbps, 40 Gbps, and 100 Gbps cards
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
The marking ADD and DROP near the connectors identifies the function of each of the corresponding
ports.
Usage guidelines
The most common application of the ROADM_9A50 is as a line ROADM in the network. It is located at
each of the site's ROADM network interfaces. The ROADM_9A50 is suitable for connection to channels
with 50GHz bandwidth that are centered over the 50GHz ITU grid.
The line port is connected to the transmission fiber (usually via amplifiers), while some of the 9-
degree ports are interconnected (mesh) with any of the other ROADM_9A50 devices.
The rest of the degree ports can be connected directly to the transceivers, splitters, Mux/DeMux
devices, or collector degree ports.
LEDs
Block diagram
10.4.8 ROADM_4FS
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
OPT9904X
Description
The ROADM_4FS is a 4-degree single-slot ROADM card that includes all the features and functionality
of the double-slot ROADM_4F.
The ROADM_4FS supports the following:
Flex-Grid operation over the extended C-band
96/48 fixed grid channels with 50/100 GHz spacing
DROP component implemented by a 1 x 4 splitter
ADD component implemented by a WSS module
OCM (Optical Channel Monitor)
Colored, colorless/directionless, or colorless/directionless/contentionless (CDC) sites, by adding
the relevant collector cards
2 pluggable CFP2 MSA amplifiers:
Booster (OPA_FBS)
Pre-amp (OPA_VLFS , OPA_LFS , or OPA_HFS)
Built-in OSC
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
The marking OUT and IN near the connectors identifies the function of each of the corresponding ports.
Usage guidelines
The most common application of the ROADM_4FS module is as a line ROADM in the network. It
is located at each of the site's ROADM network interfaces. The line port is connected to the
transmission fiber (usually via amplifiers), while some of the 4-degree ports are interconnected
(mesh) with any of the other ROADM_4FS devices.
The rest of the degree ports can be connected directly to the transceivers, splitters, Mux/DeMux
devices, or collector degree ports.
LEDs
, LINE and Red Each channel's indicator lights if insufficient power is detected at the
DEGREES LOS LEDs corresponding LINE or DEGREE port input.
(Ports 0 to 4)
Block diagram
10.4.9 ROADM_4F
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The ROADM_4F is a 4-degree double-slot ROADM card that supports the following:
Flex-Grid operation over the extended C-band
96/48 fixed grid channels with 50/100 GHz spacing
DROP component implemented by a 1 x 4 splitter
ADD component implemented by a WSS module
OCM (Optical Channel Monitor)
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
The path-through (input) signal is connected to the ADD connector in the pair and the path-through
(output) comes out through the DROP connector in the pair.
The marking ADD and DROP near the connectors identifies the function of each of the corresponding
ports.
Usage guidelines
The most common application of the ROADM_4F module is as a line ROADM in the network. It is
located at each of the site's ROADM network interfaces. The line port is connected to the
transmission fiber (usually via amplifiers), while some of the 4 degree ports are interconnected
(mesh) with any of the other ROADM_4F devices.
The rest of the degree ports can be connected directly to the transceivers, splitters, Mux/DeMux
devices, or collector degree ports.
LEDs
Block diagram
10.4.10 ROADM_4A
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
Description
The ROADM_4A is a 4-degree double-slot ROADM card that supports the following:
44 channels with 100 GHz spacing in the C band
Compatible with all 10 Gbps, 40 Gbps, and 100 Gbps cards
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
The path-through (input) signal is connected to the ADD connector in the pair and the path-through
(output) comes out through the DROP connector in the pair. The marking ADD and DROP near the
connectors identifies the function of each of the corresponding ports.
Usage guidelines
The most common application of the ROADM_4A module is as a line ROADM in the network. It is
located at each of the site's ROADM network interfaces. The ROADM_4A is suitable for connection to
channels that are centered over the 100GHz ITU grid.
The line port is connected to the transmission fiber (usually via amplifiers), while some of the 4-
degree ports are interconnected (mesh) with any of the other ROADM_4A devices.
The rest of the degree ports can be connected directly to the transceivers, splitters, Mux/DeMux
devices, or collector degree ports.
LEDs
Block diagram
10.4.11 ROADM_4A50
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
Description
The ROADM_4A50 was originally designed as a 4-degree double-slot ROADM card that supports the
following:
88 channels with 50 GHz spacing in the C band
Compatible with all 10 Gbps, 40 Gbps, and 100 Gbps cards
Upon system upgrade to V9.0, the ROADM_4A50 will automatically be upgraded to ROADM_4F
functionality, enabling Flex-Grid operation.
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
The marking ADD and DROP near the connectors identifies the function of each of the corresponding
ports.
Usage guidelines
The most common application of the ROADM_4A50 module is as a line ROADM in the network. It is
located at each of the site's ROADM network interfaces. The ROADM_4A50 is suitable for connection
to channels with 50GHz bandwidth that are centered over the 50GHz ITU grid.
The line port is connected to the transmission fiber (usually via amplifiers), while some of the 4-
degree ports are interconnected (mesh) with any of the other ROADM_4A50 devices.
The rest of the degree ports can be connected directly to the transceivers, splitters, Mux/DeMux
devices, or collector degree ports.
LEDs
Block diagram
10.4.12 ROADM_2A
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
Description
The ROADM_2A is a 2-degree double-slot ROADM card that supports the following:
44 channels with 100 GHz spacing in the C band
Compatible with all 10 Gbps, 40 Gbps, and 100 Gbps cards
Card views
Front panel
Ports
The path-through (input) signal is connected to the ADD connector in the pair and the path-through
(output) comes out through the DROP connector in the pair. The marking ADD and DROP near the
connectors identifies the function of each of the corresponding ports.
Usage guidelines
The most common application of the ROADM_2A module is as a line ROADM in the network. It is
located at each of the site's ROADM network interfaces. The ROADM_2A is suitable for connection to
channels that are centered over the 100GHz ITU grid.
The line port is connected to the transmission fiber (usually via amplifiers), while some of the 2-
degree ports are interconnected (mesh) with any of the other ROADM_2A devices.
The rest of the degree ports can be connected directly to the transceivers, splitters, Mux/DeMux
devices, or collector degree ports.
LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the module.
Port LEDs
EXPRESS LOS Red LEDs Lights if insufficient power is detected at the EXPRESS input.
LOCAL LOS Red LED Lights if insufficient power is detected at the LOCAL input.
LINE LOS Red LED Lights if insufficient power is detected at the LINE input.
Block diagram
10.4.13 ROADM_2A50
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
Description
The ROADM_2A50 is a 2-degree wide double-slot ROADM card. The ROADM_2A50 supports the
following:
88 channels with 50 GHz spacing in the C band
Compatible with all 10 Gbps, 40 Gbps, and 100 Gbps cards
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
The path-through (input) signal is connected to the ADD connector in the pair and the path-through
(output) comes out through the DROP connector in the pair. The marking ADD and DROP near the
connectors identifies the function of each of the corresponding ports.
Usage guidelines
The most common application of the ROADM_2A50 module is as a line ROADM in the network. It is
located at each of the site's ROADM network interfaces. The ROADM_2A50 is suitable for connection
to channels with 50GHz bandwidth that are centered over the 50GHz ITU grid.
The line port is connected to the transmission fiber (usually via amplifiers), while some of the 2-
degree ports are interconnected (mesh) with any of the other ROADM_2A50 devices.
The rest of the degree ports can be connected directly to the transceivers, splitters, Mux/DeMux
devices, or collector degree ports.
LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the module.
Port LEDs
EXPRESS LOS Red LEDs Lights if insufficient power is detected at the EXPRESS input.
LOCAL LOS Red LED Lights if insufficient power is detected at the LOCAL input.
LINE LOS Red LED Lights if insufficient power is detected at the LINE input.
Block diagram
10.4.14 TFA_8
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
Description
The TFA_8 is a Tunable Filter Array card that occupies a double-slot. It provides the colorless
functionality for the ROADM cards. It enables the operator to control the color of the drop ports. The
TFA_8 supports the following:
Colorless Add/Drop of up to eight 50 GHz spaced DWDM channels
88 DWDM channels of the ITU-T 50 GHz grid (Ch. 17 to Ch. 60.5)
Compatible with all 10 Gbps, 40 Gbps, and 100 Gbps cards
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
The path-through (input) signal is connected to the IN connector in the pair and the path-through
(output) comes out through the OUT connector in the pair.
Usage guidelines
A common application of TFA_8 is illustrated in the following figure.
The TFA line is connected to one of the site in-line ROADM degree ports, directly, or through a splitter.
The channel ports of the TFA (1-8) are connected to non-coherent transceivers. The TFA module
directs only a single channel to each of the connected transceivers, enabling non-coherent, colorless
operation.
NOTE: The TFA_8 card can only operate in a 50GHz fixed-grid network.
LEDs
Block diagram
The TFA_8 card includes eight tunable filters that determine the individual wavelength that will be
dropped in a certain port of a ROADM. The card has two sections (drop and add), each with its own line
input and line output connectors.
The incoming signal to the drop section is connected to the line connector LINE IN. The drop section is
implemented by a 1 x 8 splitter followed by an 8 channel tunable filter unit. In addition, a controller unit,
connected through the RS232 interface to the system's management, enables controlling the channels
that are dropped by the filters. The output signals from the eight splitter ports are fed into eight
independent tunable filters (wavelength blockers). The tunable filter can block or pass individual
channels according to control signals received from the management as configured by the user. The
resulting drop signals are provided at the C1 OUT to C8 OUT connectors.
The add section includes a 1 x 8 splitter that receives signals through eight input C1 IN to C8 IN
connectors, combines them, and provides the resulting signal at the LINE OUT connector. An isolator
on the output line prevents reflection from the connected WSS. In addition, a sample of the output
add-signal is connected to the monitoring port MON, enabling monitoring the signal for test or
maintenance purposes.
10.5.1 MXD88
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
Description
The MXD88 is a quad-slot DWDM Mux/DeMux card for 88 channels in the C band (includes Ch. 17 to
Ch. 60.5 with 50 GHz spacing) and E/W configuration. The system management can detect and read
MXD88 properties like the Serial No. and HW Rev. All connections to the card are through LC type
connectors on the front panel.
Card views
Front panel
Block diagram
88-channel C band Mux/DeMux functional block diagram
10.5.2 MXD44
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The MXD44 is a double-slot DWDM Mux/DeMux card for 44 channels in the C band (Ch. 17-Ch. 60)
with 100 GHz spacing and E/W configuration. The system management can detect and read MXD44
properties like the Serial No. and HW Rev. All connections to the card are through LC type connectors
on the front panel.
Card views
General view
Front panel
Block diagram
10.5.3 MXD16
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A
Description
The MXD16 is a single-slot DWDM Mux/DeMux card for 16 channels in the C band (Ch.21-Ch.36) with
100 GHz spacing and E/W configuration. All connections to the card are through LC type connectors on
the front panel.
Card views
MXD16 general view
10.5.4 MXD8
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A
Description
The MXD8 is a single-slot DWDM Mux/DeMux card for 8 channels in the C band (Ch. 21-Ch. 28) with
100 GHz spacing and E/W configuration. All connections to the card are through LC type connectors on
the front panel.
Card views
MXD8 general view
10.6.1 CMXD8
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A
Description
The CMXD8 is a single-slot CWDM Mux/DeMux card for eight channels with built-in 1310 nm OSC
filters and E/W configuration. The channels processed by the Mux/DeMux have nominal wavelengths of
1471 nm, 1491 nm, 1511 nm, 1531 nm, 1551 nm, 1571 nm, 1591 nm, and 1611 nm. All connections to
the card are through LC type connectors on the front panel.
Card views
General view
Front panel
The functional block diagram of the CMXD8 shows the Mux and DeMux sections with an OSC
capability:
The Mux section, whose functional block diagram is shown in part A of the previous figure,
combines the optical signals applied to the CHxx connectors (xx designates the channel number).
The -20 dB/0 dB splitter connected in the line output path provides a -20 dB sample of the optical
output signal to the MON -20 dB OUT connector, thereby enabling monitoring of the optical Mux
output signal.
A second Mux combines the main line signal with the OSC signal (1310 nm) applied to the OSC
1310nm IN connector, and provides the resulting signal at the connector marked LINE OUT.
The DeMux section, whose functional block diagram is shown in part B of the previous figure,
includes two demultiplexer units. The first separates the supervisory channel (OSC 1310 nm) from
the input signal. The resulting OSC signal appears at the OSC 1310nm OUT connector.
The -20 dB/0 dB splitter connected in the line input path provides a -20 dB sample of the optical
input signal to the MON -20 dB IN connector, thereby enabling monitoring of the optical DeMux
input signal.
The second demultiplexer, separates the optical signals applied to the LINE IN connector in
accordance with their wavelength, and provides the resulting signals at the CHxx connectors (xx
designates the channel number).
The card's OSC ports enable managing the card from a remote management station, without
occupying any of the eight CWDM channels used for data transmission.
10.6.2 COADM4_xx
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A
Description
The COADM4_x is a single-slot CWDM OADM card with four add/drop channels for E/W configuration.
The xx in the COADM4_xx designates the number of the first add/drop channel in the CWDM ITU-T
grid. All connections to the card are through LC type connectors on the front panel.
Card views
General view
Front panel
In the preceding drawing, the markings D and A designate the Drop (output) and Add (input) of the port.
Add/Drop channels
The COADM4_xx family includes two members. One adds/drops the four center channels: 1511 nm,
1531 nm, 1551 nm, and 1571 nm; the second adds/drops the four side channels: 1471 nm, 1491 nm,
1591 nm, and 1611 nm. The card types and add/drop channels are listed in the following table.
The COADM4_xx card is a CWDM OADM designed to operate in an E/W configuration. The card has
two sections (drop and add), each with its own line input and line output connectors:
The incoming line signal is applied to the line input connector LINE IN. The drop section is
implemented by four CWDM filters that extract the channel signal from the LINE IN signal.
The dropped channel signals appear at the CHxx through CHxx+3 connectors (xx designates the
specific first channel).
The output signal of the filters appears at the EXP OUT connector of the drop section.
The add section includes four CWDM filters which combine the channel add signals applied to the
CHxx through CHxx+3 connectors (xx designates the specific first channel) with the signal applied
to the EXP IN connector. The resulting signal appears at the LINE OUT connector.
In addition, -20 dB splitters are installed at the drop line side and at the add line side, enabling the
monitoring of the OADM line input and output signals. The drop line side monitoring signal appears at
the MON -20 dB IN connector and the add line side monitoring signal at the MON -20 dB OUT
connector.
10.7.1 FOADM2_xx
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A
Description
The FOADM2_xx is a single-slot fixed OADM card with two add/drop channels for E/W configuration.
The card adds/drops two adjacent DWDM 100 GHz-spaced channels. The xx in the FOADM2_xx
designates the number of the first add/drop channel in the ITU-T grid. All connections to the card are
through LC type connectors on the front panel.
Add/Drop channels
The FOADM2_xx enables operators to add/drop several of the propagating channels as a low-cost
alternative to the more expensive ROADM cards. The FOADM2_xx family includes 22 members
corresponding to 22 combinations of two adjacent channels. Note that in the FOADM2_xx the channels
are spaced 100 GHz from each other (increments of 1 in the ITU-T grid). The card types and add/drop
channels are listed in the following table.
Card views
Front panel
The markings D and A designate the Drop (output) and Add (input) of the port.
Block diagram
The FOADM2_xx card is designed to operate in an E/W configuration. The card has two sections (drop
and add), each with its own line input and line output connectors:
The incoming line signal is applied to the line input connector LINE IN. The drop section is
implemented by a 2-skip-0 filter followed by two serial 100 GHz filters that extract the channel
signal from the LINE IN signal.
The dropped channel signals appear at the CHxx and CHxx+1 connectors (xx, designates the
specific channels).
The output signal of the filters appears at the EXP OUT connector of the drop section.
The add section includes two serial 100 GHz filters and a 2-skip-0 filter which combine the
channel add signals applied to the CHxx and CHxx+1 connectors (xx, designates the specific
channels) with the signal applied to the EXP IN connector. The resulting signal appears at the
LINE OUT connector.
In addition, -20 dB splitters are installed at the drop line side and at the add line side, enabling the
monitoring of the OADM line input and output signals. The drop line side monitoring signal appears at
the MON -20 dB IN connector and the add line side monitoring signal at the MON -20 dB OUT
connector.
10.7.2 FOADM4_xx
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A
Description
The FOADM4_xx is a single-slot fixed OADM card with four add/drop channels for E/W configuration.
The card adds/drops four adjacent DWDM 100 GHz-spaced channels. The xx in the FOADM4_xx
designates the number of the first add/drop channel in the ITU-T grid. All connections to the card are
through LC type connectors on the front panel.
Add/Drop channels
The FOADM4_xx enables operators to add/drop several of the propagating channels as a low-cost
alternative to the more expensive ROADM cards. The FOADM4_xx family includes 11 members
corresponding to 11 combinations of four adjacent channels. Note that in the FOADM4_xx the channels
are spaced 100 GHz from each other (increments of 1 in the ITU-T grid). The card types and add/drop
channels are listed in the following table.
Card views
Front panel
The markings D and A designate the Drop (output) and Add (input) of the port.
Block diagram
FOADM4_xx functional block diagram
The FOADM4_xx card is designed to operate in an E/W configuration. The card has two sections (drop
and add), each with its own line input and line output connectors:
The incoming line signal is applied to the line input connector LINE IN. The drop section is
implemented by a 4-skip-0 bandpass filter followed by a block of four 100 GHz filters that extract
the channel signal from the LINE IN signal.
The dropped channel signals appear at the CHxx through CHxx+3 connectors (xx designates the
specific channels).
The output signal of the filters appears at the EXP OUT connector of the drop section.
The add section includes a block of four 100 GHz filters followed by a 4-skip-0 bandpass filter
which combine the channel add signals applied to the CHxx through CHxx+3 (xx designates the
specific channels) connectors with the signal applied to the EXP IN connector. The resulting signal
appears at the LINE OUT connector.
In addition, -20 dB splitters are installed at the drop line side and at the add line side, enabling the
monitoring of the OADM line input and output signals. The drop line side monitoring signal appears at
the MON -20 dB IN connector and the add line side monitoring signal at the MON -20 dB OUT
connector.
10.7.3 FOADM850_xx
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A
Description
The FOADM850_xx is a fixed OADM single-slot card with seven add/drop channels for E/W
configuration. The card adds/drops seven adjacent DWDM 50 GHz-spaced channels; the eighth
channel is cut by the card's filter and cannot be used. The xx in the FOADM850_xx designates the
number of the first add/drop channel in the ITU-T grid. All connections to the card are through LC type
connectors on the front panel.
Card views
General view
Front panel
Add/Drop channels
The FOADM850_xx enables operators to add/drop several of the propagating channels, as a low-cost
alternative to the more expensive ROADM cards. The FOADM850_xx family includes 11 members
corresponding to 11 combinations of eight adjacent channels. Note that in the FOADM850_xx, the
channels are spaced 50 GHz from each other (increments of 0.5 in the ITU-T grid). Each card
adds/drops seven channels. The closest channel to these seven channels (at both ends) is blocked by
the FOADM and does not come out on any port.
The card types, add/drop, and blocked channels are listed in the following table.
Block diagram
FOADM850_xx functional block diagram
The FOADM850_xx card is designed to operate in an E/W configuration. The card has two sections
(drop and add), each with its own line input and line output connectors:
The incoming line signal is applied to the LINE IN connector of the drop section. The drop function
is performed by a 7-skip-1 bandpass filter with 50 GHz spacing, followed by an interleaver and two
demultiplexers that extract the channel signals from the LINE IN signal.
The dropped channel signals spaced 50 GHz apart appear at the CHxx, CHxx+0.5, CHxx+1,... to
CHxx+3 connectors (xx designates the first drop channel, the marking D designates the drop
channel output).
The resulting signal after the channels drop appears at the EXP OUT (Express output) connector
of the drop section.
The input signal to the add section is applied to the EXP IN (Express input) connector of the add
section and through a 75%/25% splitter to a 7-skip-1 filter. The add function is performed by three
100 GHz filters and three 50%/50% splitters followed by the 7-skip-1 bandpass filter with 50 GHz
spacing.
The add signals are applied through the CHxx, CHxx+0.5, CHxx+1,... to CHxx+3 connectors to
the 100 GHz filters, except for the 7th that is directly applied to the second 50%/50% splitter (xx
designates the first add channel, the marking A designates the add channel input).
The resulting signal of the express input with the added channels appears at the LINE OUT
connector.
In addition, -20 dB/0 dB splitters are installed at the drop line side and at the add line side, enabling the
monitoring of the OADM line input and output signals. The drop line side monitoring signal appears at
the MON -20 dB IN connector and the add line side monitoring signal at the MON -20 dB OUT
connector.
10.8.1 CT_1310_2
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A
Description
The CT_1310_2 is a single-slot optical card that includes two separate CT filters with a 1310 nm OSC
port each. All connections to the card are through LC type connectors on the front panel.
Card views
CT_1310_2 front panel
The card incorporates two sets of filters whose ports are marked with suffix 1 and 2. Each filter works
with an OSC Mux/DeMux pair. The functions of set 1 are as follows (the functions of set 2 are identical):
The OSC DeMux is used to separate the 1310 nm optical OSC from the C band payload signal (in
the 1550 nm range). The DeMux has one input connector (LINE 1 IN) and two output connectors,
C-BAND 1 OUT (C band) and 1310 nm 1 OUT (OSC signal).
The OSC Mux is used to combine the two signals before they are sent to the line. The Mux has
two input connectors, C-BAND 1 IN and 1310 nm 1 IN (OSC signal), and one output connector,
LINE 1 OUT.
10.8.2 CT_1510_2
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A
Description
The CT_1510_2 is a single-slot optical card that includes two separate CT filters with a 1510 nm OSC
port each. All connections to the card are through LC type connectors on the front panel.
Card views
General view
Front panel
The card incorporates two sets of filters whose ports are marked with suffix 1 and 2. Each filter works
with an OSC Mux/DeMux pair. The functions of set 1 are as follows (the functions of set 2 are identical):
The OSC DeMux is used to separate the 1510 nm optical OSC from the C band payload signal (in
the 1550 nm range). The DeMux has one input connector (LINE 1 IN) and two output connectors,
C-BAND 1 OUT (C band) and 1510 nm 1 OUT (OSC signal).
The OSC Mux is used to combine the two signals before they are sent to the line. The Mux has
two input connectors, C-BAND 1 IN and 1510 nm 1 IN (OSC signal), and one output connector,
LINE 1 OUT.
10.8.3 CT_OTDR_2
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A
Description
The CT_OTDR_2 is a single-slot optical card that includes two separate filters. Each filter
Muxes/DeMuxes the 1610 nm OTDR, C-Band, and 1510 nm OSC signals. The OTDR signal is a light
pulse that enables to determine the location of a fiber cut, by connecting an OTDR device to the OTDR
port. All connections to the card are through LC type connectors on the front panel.
The CT_OTDR_2 Muxes/DeMuxes the 1610 nm OTDR, C-band, and 1510 nm OSC signals. OTDR
filter cards may be placed at the end of the span that should be monitored by OTDR. Usually, it is
placed between an EDFA card and the transmission fiber end. The OTDR filter card should not be
employed on spans that include Raman amplification.
Card views
General view
Front panel
The CT_OTDR_2 includes two independent CLT filter pairs – each performs full Mux/DeMux of the C-
band, 1510nm OSC, and 1610nm OTDR signals. The card incorporates two sets of filters whose ports
are marked with suffix 1 and 2. Each filter works with a Mux/DeMux pair. The functions of set 1 are as
follows (the functions of set 2 are identical):
The DeMux separates the 1510 nm optical OSC, C band payload signal (in the 1550 nm range),
and 1610 nm OTDR from the line signal. The DeMux has one input connector (LINE 1 IN) and
three output connectors: C-BAND 1 OUT (C band), OSC-1510 1 OUT (OSC signal), and OTDR-
1610 1.
The Mux combines the three signals before they are sent to the line. The Mux has three input
connectors: C-BAND 1 IN, OSC -1510 1 IN (OSC signal), OTDR-1610 1 IN, and one output
connector: LINE 1 OUT.
Block diagram
Usage guidelines
When a fiber span includes OTDR filters (C_xxx_OTDR) at both sides, an open (non-terminated) OTDR
tap port at the far side of the span will result in high back-reflection of the OTDR signal. The strong
back-reflected signal may be double back-reflected by the fiber splices/connectors and result in
generation of "ghost events".
This can be prevented by connecting "OTDR termination" to the open OTDR Tap ports.
The OTDR termination is supplied with the filter card installation kit, and it is highly recommended to
use it.
The red circles mark the ports that should be terminated with the "OTDR termination".
10.8.4 CT_OTDR_2_WIDE
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A
Description
The CT_OTDR_2_WIDE is a single-slot optical card that includes two separate filters. Each filter
Muxes/DeMuxes the 1610 nm OTDR, C-Band, and OSC 1510 nm with Wide-band channels (marked
as WIDE port). The OTDR signal is a light pulse that enables to determine the location of a fiber cut, by
connecting an OTDR device to the OTDR port. The CT_OTDR_2_WIDE is similar to the CT_OTDR_2 ,
and differs only in the WIDE port that provides an option for transferring more optical channels. All
connections to the card are through LC type connectors on the front panel.
The CT_OTDR_2_WIDE Muxes/DeMuxes the 1610 nm OTDR, C-band, and WIDE port signals. OTDR
filter cards may be placed at the end of the span that should be monitored by OTDR. Usually, it is
placed between an EDFA card and the transmission fiber end. The OTDR filter card should not be
employed on spans that include Raman amplification.
Card views
General view
Front panel
The CT_OTDR_2_WIDE includes two independent CLT filter pairs – each performs full Mux/DeMux of
the C-band, Wide-band, and 1610nm OTDR signals. The card incorporates two sets of filters whose
ports are marked with suffix 1 and 2. Each filter works with a Mux/DeMux pair. The functions of set 1
are as follows (the functions of set 2 are identical):
The DeMux separates the OSC-1510 signal and the other WIDE port channels, C band payload
signal (in the 1550 nm range), and 1610 nm OTDR from the line signal. The DeMux has one input
connector (LINE 1 IN) and three output connectors: C-BAND 1 OUT (C band), OSC-1510 WIDE 1
OUT (OSC and other channels in the Wide-band), and OTDR-1610 1.
The Mux combines the three signals before they are sent to the line. The Mux has three input
connectors: C-BAND 1 IN, OSC-1510 WIDE 1 IN (OSC and other Wide-band channels), OTDR-
1610 1 IN, and one output connector: LINE 1 OUT.
Note that the OSC 1510 nm signal must be mixed with the required Wide-band channels through an
additional filter before connecting it to the OSC-1510 WIDE port. Similarly, at the other end the OSC-
1510 nm signal is mixed with the other Wide-band channels. A filter must be used at the OSC-1510
WIDE OUT port to separate the signals.
10.8.5 C_OTDR_2
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A
Description
The C_OTDR_2 is a single-slot optical card that includes two separate filters. Each filter
Muxes/DeMuxes the 1610 nm OTDR signal with the combined 1510 nm OSC and C-Band signals. The
OTDR signal is a light pulse that enables you to determine the location of a fiber cut, by connecting an
OTDR device to the OTDR port. All connections to the card are through LC type connectors on the front
panel.
OTDR filter cards may be placed at the end of the span that should be monitored by OTDR. Usually, it
is placed between an EDFA card and the transmission fiber end. The OTDR filter card should not be
employed on spans that include Raman amplification.
The C_OTDR_2 differs from the CT_OTDR_2 by the fact that in this card the C-Band and OSC 1510
nm signals arrive already combined at the input and the output for these signals is also a combined
one.
TIP: The C-Band+OSC port can support 1310nm (O-Band) signals as well, for combining
OTDR and 1310nm gray interfaces.
Card views
General view
Front panel
The C_OTDR_2 includes two independent CLT filter pairs – each performs full Mux/DeMux of the C-
band, and the combined 1510nm OSC and 1610nm OTDR signals. The card incorporates two sets of
filters whose ports are marked with suffix 1 and 2. Each filter works with an OSC Mux/DeMux pair. The
functions of set 1 are as follows (the functions of set 2 are identical):
The DeMux separates the combined 1510 nm optical OSC and C-band payload signals from the
OTDR 1610 nm signal. The DeMux has one input connector (LINE 1 IN) and two output
connectors, C-BAND + OSC 1 OUT (combined C-BAND and OSC signals) and OTDR-1610 nm 1
OUT (OTDR signal).
The Mux combines the two signals before they are sent to the line. The Mux has two input
connectors, labeled C-BAND 1 + OSC 1 IN and OTDR-1610 1 IN (OTDR signal), and one output
connector, LINE 1 OUT.
Block diagram
Usage guidelines
When a fiber span includes OTDR filters (C_xxx_OTDR) at both sides, an open (non-terminated) OTDR
tap port at the far side of the span will result in high back-reflection of the OTDR signal. The strong
back-reflected signal may be double back-reflected by the fiber splices/connectors and result in
generation of "ghost events".
This can be prevented by connecting "OTDR termination" to the open OTDR Tap ports.
The OTDR termination is supplied with the filter card installation kit, and it is highly recommended to
use it.
The red circles mark the ports that should be terminated with the "OTDR termination".
10.8.6 SP_SM_4
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A
Description
The SP_SM_4 is a single-slot quad splitter/coupler for single mode (SM) fibers with 50% ratio card that
includes four identical splitter/coupler units. All connections to the card are through LC type connectors
on the front panel.
The splitters divide an input signal into two equal signals. The couplers combine two input signals. The
SP_SM_4 provides four splitter/coupler units, supporting up to four fixed protected services
simultaneously.
Card views
General view
Front panel
The front panel markings do not refer to splitter or coupler but rather to users and services. The
corresponding ports are marked with numbers from 1 to 4 accordingly.
The SP_SM_4 has four splitters/couplers, each marked with numbers from 1 to 4. Each unit has three
connectors, marked USER, SERV-A, and SERV-B with the corresponding number suffix. The following
describes the ports of unit 1 (the same functions are provided by the other three units). The input signal
to the splitter is connected to the USER 1 IN connector. Two equal output signals are received at
connectors SERV-A 1 OUT and SERV-B 1 OUT. The coupler in unit 1 receives two signals connected
to connectors SERV-A 1 IN and SERV-B 1 IN, and the resulting combined signal is provided at
connector USER 1 OUT.
10.8.7 SP_MM_4
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A
Description
The SP_MM_4 is a single-slot quad splitter/coupler for multi-mode (MM) fibers with 50% ratio card that
includes four identical splitter/coupler units. All connections to the card are through LC type connectors
on the front panel.
The splitters divide an input signal into two equal signals. The couplers combine two input signals. The
SP_MM_4 provides four splitter/coupler units, supporting up to four fixed protected services
simultaneously.
Card views
Front panel
The front panel markings do not refer to splitter or coupler but rather to users and services. The
corresponding ports are marked with numbers from 1 to 4 accordingly.
The card has four splitters/couplers, each marked with numbers from 1 to 4. Each unit has three
connectors, marked USER, SERV-A, and SERV-B with the corresponding number suffix. The following
describes the ports of unit 1 (the same functions are provided by the three other units). The input signal
to the splitter is connected to the USER 1 IN connector. Two equal output signals are received at
connectors SERV-A 1 OUT and SERV-B 1 OUT. The coupler in unit 1 receives two signals connected
to connectors SERV-A 1 IN and SERV-B 1 IN and the resulting combined signal is provided at
connector USER 1 OUT.
10.8.8 SP_CE4_2
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A
Description
The SP_CE4_2 is a single-slot double splitter/coupler card for four services with 25% ratio. The card
includes two identical splitter/coupler units. All connections to the card are through LC type connectors
on the front panel.
The splitters divide an input signal into four equal signals (25% ratio). The couplers combine four input
signals. The SP_CE4_2 provides two splitter/coupler units, supporting up to four fixed protected
services simultaneously suitable for directionless/colorless ROADM sites.
Card views
General view
Front panel
The front panel markings refer to SPLITTER A and SPLITTER B, where each unit includes a 4-way
splitter/coupler. The corresponding ports are marked with numbers from 1 to 4 accordingly.
The card has two splitters/couplers marked SPLITTER A and SPLITTER B. The following describes the
ports of unit A (the same functions are provided by the second unit (B)). The input signal to the splitter
is connected to the LINE-A IN connector. Four equal output signals (25% of the input signal each) are
provided at connectors P1-A OUT through P4-A OUT. The coupler in unit A receives four signals
connected to connectors P1-A IN through P4-A IN, and the resulting combined signal is provided at
connector LINE-A OUT.
10.8.9 SP_CE8_1
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A
Description
The SP_CE8_1 is a single-slot 1 x 8 splitter/coupler card, used for C/CD reception of coherent channels
in both coherent networks and mixed networks (including both coherent and non-coherent channels).
All connections to the card are through LC type connectors on the front panel.
The SP_CE8_1 provides a splitter/coupler unit, supporting up to eight fixed protected services
simultaneously suitable for directionless/colorless ROADM sites. The splitter divides an input signal into
eight equal signals (12.5% ratio). The coupler combines eight input signals into a single signal.
Card views
General view
Front panel
The input signal to the splitter is connected to the LINE IN connector. Eight equal signals (12.5 % of the
input signal each) are provided at connectors P1 OUT to P8 OUT.
The coupler unit receives eight signal, connected to connectors P1 IN to P8 IN, and the resulting
combined signal is provided at connector LINE OUT.
10.8.10 SP_CE16_1
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A
Description
The SP_CE16_1 is a single-slot 1 x 16 splitter/coupler card, used for C/CD reception of coherent
channels in both coherent networks and mixed networks (including both coherent and non-coherent
channels). All connections to the card are through LC type connectors on the front panel.
The SP_CE16_1 provides a splitter/coupler unit, supporting up to sixteen fixed protected services
simultaneously, suitable for directionless/colorless ROADM sites. The splitter divides an input signal
into sixteen equal signals (6.25% ratio). The coupler combines sixteen input signals into a single signal.
Card views
General view
Front panel
The input signal to the splitter is connected to the LINE IN connector. Sixteen equal signals (6.25% of
the input signal each) are provided at connectors P1 OUT to P16 OUT.
The coupler unit receives sixteen signals, connected to connectors P1 IN to P16 IN, and the resulting
combined signal is provided at connector LINE OUT.
Block diagram
10.8.11 SP_CE32_1
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A
Description
The SP_CE32_1 is a double-slot card that includes two independent splitter/coupler sections: a 1 x 32
bidirectional splitter/coupler unit and a 1 x 2 bidirectional splitter/coupler unit. It is used for coherent CD
(colorless-directionless) and CDC reception in ROADM nodes. In particular, the card is employed in
pure coherent networks. All connections to the card are through LC type connectors on the front panel.
Card views
General view
Front panel
The line port of the 1 x 32 bidirectional splitter/coupler (at the left side of the card) is marked LINE; the
other ports are marked P1 to P32. Similarly, the line port of the 1 x 2 bidirectional splitter/coupler (at the
right side of the card) is marked LINE and the two other ports are marked P34 and P35.
The 1 x 32 section divides an input signal into 32 equal signals (3.125% ratio). The coupler combines
32 input signals.
The 1 x 2 section divides an input signal into two equal signals (50% ratio). The coupler of this section
combines 2 input signals.
The following single slot filters are installed in Artemis and/or Apollo platforms:
CT_1510/1490 : Single slot C/T filter, in which the synchronization signal is carried on a single TX
fiber (1510/1490nm).
CT_1510/1490_OTDR : Single slot C/T filter, in which the synchronization signal is carried on a
single TX fiber (1510/1490nm), with OTDR over 1610nm in service monitoring on RX fiber.
CT_1590_1511_OTDR : Single slot C/T filter, in which the synchronization signal is carried on a
single TX fiber (1511.05/1511.81nm), with OSC signal carried over 1590nm and OTDR signal
over 1610nm.
CT_1610 : Single slot C/T filter, in which the synchronization signal is carried on a single TX fiber
(1610.93/1611.80nm). This filter is appropriate for use in situations where external filters can’t be
added at the xHRSF line input, due to the Raman pump.
10.9.1 CT_1510/1490
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A
Description
The CT_1510/1490 is a single-slot C/T filter, in which the synchronization signal is carried on a single
TX fiber (1510/1490nm).
Card views
General view
Front panel
Block diagram
10.9.2 CT_1510/1490_OTDR
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A
Description
The CT_1510/1490_OTDR is a single-slot C/T filter, in which the synchronization signal is carried on a
single TX fiber (1510/1490nm), with OTDR over 1610nm in-service monitoring on the RX fiber.
Card views
General view
Front panel
Usage guidelines
When a fiber span includes OTDR filters (C_xxx_OTDR) at both sides, an open (non-terminated) OTDR
tap port at the far side of the span will result in high back-reflection of the OTDR signal. The strong
back-reflected signal may be double back-reflected by the fiber splices/connectors and result in
generation of "ghost events".
This can be prevented by connecting "OTDR termination" to the open OTDR Tap ports.
The OTDR termination is supplied with the filter card installation kit, and it is highly recommended to
use it.
The red circles mark the ports that should be terminated with the "OTDR termination".
Block diagram
10.9.3 CT_1590_1511_OTDR
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A
Description
The CT_1510_1511_OTDR is a single-slot C/T filter, in which the synchronization signal is carried on a
single TX fiber (1511.05/1511.81nm), with OSC signal carried over 1590nm and OTDR over 1610nm.
Card views
General view
Front panel
Usage guidelines
When a fiber span includes OTDR filters (C_xxx_OTDR) at both sides, an open (non-terminated) OTDR
tap port at the far side of the span will result in high back-reflection of the OTDR signal. The strong
back-reflected signal may be double back-reflected by the fiber splices/connectors and result in
generation of "ghost events".
This can be prevented by connecting "OTDR termination" to the open OTDR Tap ports.
The OTDR termination is supplied with the filter card installation kit, and it is highly recommended to
use it.
The red circles mark the ports that should be terminated with the "OTDR termination".
Block diagram
10.9.4 CT_1610
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A
Description
The CT_1610 is a single-slot C/T filter, in which the synchronization signal is carried on a single TX
fiber (1611.93/1610.80nm). This filter is appropriate for use in situations where external filters can’t be
added at the xHRSF line input, due to the RAMAN pump.
Card views
General view
Front panel
Block diagram
In a single-fiber bidirectional DWDM communication system, half of the channels are used to transmit in
one direction, while the other half carries the traffic in the other direction. The 44 channels can deliver
22 services. The following figure illustrates a block diagram of a single-fiber bidirectional DWDM link.
The following figure illustrates a typical single-fiber bidirectional DWDM link application.
The Blue channels are transmitted from left to right and the Red in the opposite direction. The R/B
filters separate the Blue and Red channels passing the link. Optical amplifiers compensate for the
signal loss caused by the various Mux/DeMux and filters. Two different OCS channels control the
amplifiers' operation; one at 1510 nm, and the second at 1590 nm. The CLT filters separate the traffic
(Red/Blue channels) and the OSC signals. In-Line amplifiers, as shown in the middle section, are
required only for very long spans.
10.10.1 R/B_2
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A
Description
The R/B_2 is a single-slot Red/Blue filter card for use in single-fiber bidirectional network applications. It
includes two different Red/Blue filters. All connections to the card are through LC type connectors on
the front panel.
Card views
R/B_2 front panel
The card incorporates two sets of different R/B filters whose ports are marked with suffix 1 or 2:
The functions of set 1 are as follows:
The C-band payload is delivered to/from the filter through the bidirectional port LINE 1. The
filter separates the Blue channels from the incoming signal and provides them through the
unidirectional port BLUE 1 OUT.
The filter combines the Red channels coming in through the unidirectional port RED 1 IN with
the C-band payload and provides the resulting signal in the opposite direction via port LINE 1.
The functions of set 2 are as follows:
The C-band payload is delivered to/from the filter through the bidirectional port LINE 2. The
filter separates the Red channels from the incoming signal and provides them through the
unidirectional port RED 2 OUT.
The filter combines the Blue channels coming in through the unidirectional port BLUE 2 IN
with the C-band payload and provides the resulting signal in the opposite direction via port
LINE 2.
10.10.2 CLT_1510/1590
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A
Description
The CLT_1510/1590 is a single-slot CLT filter card for use in bidirectional network applications. It
includes two different CLT filters. All connections to the card are through LC type connectors on the
front panel.
The CLT_1510/1590 enables to add/drop two Optical Supervisory Channels (OSCs) at 1590 nm and
1510 nm that carry management information between optical nodes in bidirectional DWDM
applications. SFP transceivers (typically combined with optical amplifiers in ILA sites) support the OSC
functions.
Card views
Front panel
Typical application
10.11.1 OMSP
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
OPT9904X
Description
The OMSP is a single-slot card that provides multiplex section protection at the optical line level. OMSP
modules switch traffic to the protection path when a failure occurs on the main path, and vice versa.
The OMSP provides the following main features and functions:
Low-loss fiber protection
Real-time monitoring of protected fibers
Bidirectional operation
Protection switching in less than 50 msec
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
The OMSP card consists of two sections:
Transmit section, including:
Input signal monitor (PD in) for monitoring the incoming signal level (received at the
COMMON IN connector).
Pilot transmitter for generating an optical signal that enables monitoring the condition of the
protection fiber; (in the preceding figure it's the PATH-B OUT connector. However, it can also
be the PATH-A OUT, depending which is the protection path).
Path selector, an optical switch that normally connects the incoming signal to the main fiber
(in the preceding figure it's the PATH-A OUT connector. However, it can also be the PATH-B
OUT, depending which is the main path) and the pilot signal to the protection fiber.
The connections are interchanged when the path selector changes position (see dashed lines
in the preceding figure).
Receive section, including:
PD1 photo diode detector for monitoring the input power signal provided to the COMMON
OUT connector from the (far end) main path; (in the preceding figure it's the PATH-A IN
connector. However, it can also be PATH-B IN, depending which is the main path).
PD2 pilot detector for monitoring the protection fiber (in the preceding figure it's the PATH-B
IN connector. However, it can also be the PATH-A IN, depending which is the protection
path), and evaluating the pilot optical signal received from the far side.
Path selector, an optical switch that normally connects the optical signal received through the
main fiber (in the preceding figure it's the PATH-A IN connector. However, it can also be the
PATH-B IN, depending which is the protection path) to the COMMON OUT connector and the
optical signal received through the protection fiber to the PD2 pilot detector.
The connections are interchanged when the path selector changes position (see dashed lines
in the preceding figure).
LEDs
Block diagram
OMSP functional block diagram
During normal operation, the OMSP modules connect the signals to the main fibers while monitoring
the protection fibers via the pilot signal.
In the event of a failure on one of the main fibers, the traffic is switched to the protection fibers by the
following process:
1. The signal no longer reaches the LOS detector at the receive side. This condition causes the path
selector at the corresponding side to interchange the main and protection fibers.
2. The detectors at the other side sense the interchange between the two paths as they receive the
signals on different fibers. In response, the path selector of the remote OMSP module also
switches to the protection path.
As a result, the payload paths through the whole system are restored, using the protection pair of fibers.
10.11.2 OLP_S2
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
OPT9904X
Description
The OLP_S2 is an Optical Line Protection (OLP) card that provides protection for two services of Apollo
DWDM networks, while increasing the network's reliability and availability in a cost-effective manner.
The card enables protection against fiber cuts, signal failures, loss of signal quality or power
degradation, and card failures at the DWDM layer and saves duplicating the network infrastructure.
The card was designed as an integrated solution for Apollo platforms that saves the use of high-cost
external OEM protection units. It protects Apollo service cards such as transponders, combiners, AoC,
and FIO cards. The card occupies one slot in the platforms. The OLP_S2 is intended to work with SM
(Single Mode) fibers.
In a protection mechanism a single failure may trigger multiple recovery mechanisms, which may
interact with each other, and cause the protection switching respond to non-stable network states. To
prevent this, a hold-off timer is used. The timer is used by underlying traffic layers to filter out non-stable
link faults.
The OLP_S2 has a configurable hold-off timer that can be provisioned by the user according to the
card/service it is protecting.
The hold-off timer is activated when one or more defect conditions are detected in the protection group,
and it runs for a provisioned period. When the time interval of the timer expires, the fault status of all
traffic signals is passed to the protection switching process to act upon them.
The OLP_S2 provides the following main features and functions:
1 + 1 protection of two services for optical line and client.
Service protection for all Apollo service cards with OTUk ports.
Fiber protection for all Apollo optic cards with DWDM OTS ports. Useful in cases where pilot tone
is not required and/or using unidirectional protection.
Protection switching in less than 50 msec.
Ability to configure protection reversion. By default it is a non-reversion protection.
Ability to configure hold-off timer values. By default its value is 0 seconds.
Metro and long-haul traffic protection.
Card views
General view
Front panel
Usage guidelines
OLP_S2 protection capabilities include:
(1+1) service protection on network ports (i.e. OTUk)
(1+1) fiber protection on DWDM ports
(1+1) service protection on non OTUk ports (using non-colored transceivers)
(1+1) service protection on non-OTUk ports (using colored transceivers)
LEDs
Block diagram
Several safety mechanisms are implemented in the optical amplifier cards to prevent human-eye
exposure to dangerous laser light.
NOTE: Fiber discontinuities, such as those caused by sharp bends, improper splicing, and
so on, have a negative effect on the achievable gain. Therefore, discontinuities must
carefully be avoided.
The maximum pump power that can be used is influenced by safety considerations and not only by
component limitations (the pump signal remains at Hazard Level 3B for many kilometers, and special
precautions are needed to protect personnel in case the fiber is cut or disconnected at a remote
location).
10.12.4 OA_PA
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The OA_PA is a fixed gain EDFA-based amplifier optimized as a preamplifier for metro applications.
The card occupies one slot in the platforms.
The OA_PA amplifier operates at a very specific gain value, maintaining a fixed ratio between input and
output power to provide flat amplification. To achieve this, the OA_PA uses a built-in VOA to
automatically adjust the fiber span loss it is compensating for to its optimized gain value. This VOA
lowers the channel power at the input of the amplifier, thereby degrading the OSNR at the output of the
amplifier.
Functions
Optical amplification (power and gain control)
Transients suppression
Output power monitoring point
High sensitivity
Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
Back-reflection (BR) detection mechanism
Monitoring and alarms
1510 nm SFP for OSC channel (optional)
Card views
General view
Front panel
NOTE: The EDFA amplifier LED markings are indicated in a rectangle at the lower left
side of the front panel.
Ports
Port name Connector Function
AMP IN LC Amplifier line input connector
AMP OUT LC Amplifier output connector
MON OUT - LC Monitor connector used to connect test equipment (like OPM or OSA);
20dB provides an -20 dB sample from the amplifier output signal.
OSC SFP To house an optional 1510 nm SFP that provides an FE control
communications channel.
LEDs
Block diagram
10.12.5 OA_FB
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The OA_FB is a fixed gain EDFA-based amplifier optimized as a power booster for terminal and
ROADM sites with up to 88 DWDM channels. The card occupies one slot in the platforms.
In addition to the standard amplifier mode, the OA_FB can work in two other modes:
Automatic Power Control (APC) mode, for Noise Generator applications, intended to support to
support third parties requirements. In APC mode, the amplifier pumps are turned on although
there is no input signal. Such operation mode leads to generation of strong ASE (amplified
spontaneous emission) noise at the amplifier output, thereby turning the amplifier into a noise
source.
Automatic Current Control (ACC) mode, optimized to work in optical supervisory channel (OSC)
signal amplifier application for the OA_HRSF. Generally, the OA_HRSF is used to amplify optical
signals on ultra-high spans. The OSC has also to reach the end of these spans with adequate
power. However, this signal is significantly attenuated when traversing such distances. The
solution is to amplify the OSC to the required level. The OA_FB-R is used for this application.
In its regular operation an optical amplifier determines the gain by sampling the input and the
output signals and calculating the required amplification according to the average. Because the
OSC control signal operates at a relatively low rate (2 Mpbs, 5 Mbps, 100 Mbps) the sampling
photo-diodes will provide mistaken results. To overcome this problem, the OA_FB is operated in
an ACC mode, in which the pump current is automatically controlled. In addition, each amplifier
gain is checked at manufacturing to make sure it provides the required gain.
The OA_FB amplifier operates at a very specific gain value, maintaining a fixed ratio between input and
output power to provide flat amplification. To achieve this, the OA_FB uses a built-in VOA to
automatically adjust the fiber span loss it is compensating for to its optimized gain value. This VOA
lowers the channel power at the input of the amplifier, thereby degrading the OSNR at the output of the
amplifier.
Functions
Optical amplification (power and gain control)
Transient suppression
Output power monitoring point
High output power
Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
BR detection mechanism
Monitoring and alarms
1510 nm SFP for OSC channel (optional)
Card views
General view
Front panel
NOTE: The EDFA amplifier LED markings are indicated in a rectangle at the lower left
side of the front panel.
Ports
Port name Connector Function
AMP IN LC Amplifier line input connector
AMP OUT LC Amplifier output connector
MON OUT - LC Monitor connector used to connect test equipment (like OPM or OSA);
20dB provides an -20 dB sample from the amplifier output signal.
OSC SFP To house an optional 1510 nm SFP that provides an FE control
communications channel.
LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault
EDFA LEDs
IN Red LED Blinks when the input power signal is missing or is too low for normal
operation (LOS condition). Off when the input signal is normal.
OUT Green LED Lights steadily when the pump laser is on and the output power is
above the preset threshold. Off when the output power is below the
threshold (LOP condition).
BR Orange LED Lights when the level of BR exceeds the preset threshold. Usually this
indicates a disconnection or break in the fiber connected to the AMP
OUT connector.
OSC LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the OSC laser transmits.
F/L Red LED Blinks when the OSC input signal is missing or is too low for normal
operation. Lights when a fault is detected in the OSC path.
Block diagram
10.12.6 OA_M
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The OA_M is a variable gain EDFA-based amplifier with MSA, optimized for high gain spans before In-
Line and ROADM sites in Regional/LH applications supporting up to 88 DWDM channels. The card
occupies one slot in the platforms.
The OA_M has variable gain control and high output power (+20.5 dBm). Considering its multistage
design which enables the insertion of a dispersion compensation unit without affecting the link optical
budget, the OA_M is especially suited for long-haul applications. High channel count DWDM networks
with a reach of beyond 1500 km without OEO regeneration are possible.
The OA_M amplifier gain can be adjusted without using VOA, thereby maintaining optimal OSNR for
any fiber span length. In addition, the OA_M has a higher output power, which means that fewer
amplifiers are needed.
The OA_M amplifier structure is very similar to the OA_ML; for a detailed description of the signal path
in the amplifier see OA_ML Functional Description.
Functions
Optical amplification (power and gain control)
Transient suppression
Output power monitoring point
Two amplification stages
Midstage for connecting a dispersion compensation unit
Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
BR detection mechanism
Monitoring and alarms
1510 nm SFP for OSC channel (optional)
Card views
General view
.
Front panel
Ports
Port name Connector Function
AMP IN LC
Amplifier external line input connector that is also the input to the
1st.stage.
MID STAGE LC
OUT Output from the 1st stage.
MID STAGE IN LC
Input to the 2nd stage
AMP OUT LC
Amplifier external line output connector that is also the output from
the 2nd stage.
MON OUT - LC
20dB Monitor connector used to connect test equipment (like OPM or
OSA); provides an -20 dB sample from the amplifier output signal.
NOTE: The EDFA amplifier LED markings are indicated in a rectangle at the lower left
side of the front panel.
LEDs
Block diagram
The OA_ML consists of two amplification stages with separate input and output connectors. It is
therefore possible to insert optical components between the MID-STAGE OUT and MID-STAGE IN
connectors (this is referred to as “the midstage”). The high power second (output) stage is located at
the middle of the card.
The external input line is connected to the AMP IN connector, and the external output line is connected
to the AMP OUT connector. The output power of the second stage can be monitored at the MON -20
dB connector.
The advantages of this capability are evident in many typical applications. For example, when the
OA_ML is used as an inline amplifier in a long-haul network, a dispersion compensation device can be
inserted in the midstage to compensate for the chromatic dispersion of the fiber span.
10.12.7 OA_ML
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The OA_ML is a variable gain EDFA-based amplifier with-mid stage access (MSA), optimized for low
gain spans before In-Line and ROADM sites in Regional/LH applications with up to 88 DWDM
channels. The card occupies one slot in the platforms.
The OA_ML has variable gain control and high output power (+20.5 dBm). Considering its multistage
design that enables the insertion of a dispersion compensation unit (DCF) without affecting the link
optical budget, the OA_ML is especially suited for long-haul applications. High channel count DWDM
networks with a reach of beyond 1500 km without OEO regeneration are possible.
The OA_ML amplifier gain can be adjusted without using VOA, thereby maintaining optimal OSNR for
any fiber span length. In addition, it has a higher output power, which means that fewer amplifiers are
needed.
Functions
Optical amplification (power and gain control)
Transient suppression
Output power monitoring point
Card Views
General view
Front panel
Ports
NOTE: The EDFA amplifier LED markings are indicated in a rectangle at the lower left
side of the front panel.
LEDs
Block diagram
The OA_ML consists of two amplification stages with separate input and output connectors. It is
therefore possible to insert optical components between the MID-STAGE OUT and MID-STAGE IN
connectors (this is referred to as “the midstage”). The high power second (output) stage is located at
the middle of the card.
The external input line is connected to the AMP IN connector, and the external output line is connected
to the AMP OUT connector. The output power of the second stage can be monitored at the MON -20
dB connector.
The advantages of this capability are evident in many typical applications. For example, when the
OA_ML is used as an inline amplifier in a long-haul network, a dispersion compensation device can be
inserted in the midstage to compensate for the chromatic dispersion of the fiber span.
10.12.8 OA_L
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The OA_L is a variable gain single-stage EDFA optimized for medium gain spans in coherent networks
applications. The EDFA is supporting up to 88 DWDM channels. The card occupies one slot in the
platforms.
The OA_L is an EDFA optimized for coherent networks that do not require DCF support.
The OA_L amplifier structure is very similar to the OA_FB and OA_PA; for a detailed description of the
signal path in the amplifier see OA_PA and OA_FB.
Functions
Variable gain optical amplification (15-28 dB)
High output power (20.5 dBm)
Transient suppression
Output power monitoring point
Single amplification stage
Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
BR detection mechanism
Monitoring and alarms
1510 nm SFP for OSC channel (optional)
Card views
General view
Front panel
NOTE: The EDFA amplifier LED markings are indicated in a rectangle at the lower left
side of the front panel.
Ports
Port name Connector Function
AMP IN LC Amplifier line input connector
AMP OUT LC Amplifier output connector
MON OUT - LC Monitor connector used to connect test equipment (like OPM or OSA);
20dB provides an -20 dB sample from the amplifier output signal.
OSC SFP To house an optional 1510 nm SFP that provides an FE control
communications channel.
LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault
EDFA LEDs
IN Red LED Blinks when the input power signal is missing or is too low for normal
operation (LOS condition). Off when the input signal is normal.
OUT Green LED Lights steadily when the pump laser is on and the output power is
above the preset threshold. Off when the output power is below the
threshold (LOP condition).
BR Orange LED Lights when the level of BR exceeds the preset threshold. Usually this
indicates a disconnection or break in the fiber connected to the AMP
OUT connector.
OSC LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the OSC laser transmits.
F/L Red LED Blinks when the OSC input signal is missing or is too low for normal
operation. Lights when a fault is detected in the OSC path.
Block diagram
10.12.9 OA_LF
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
OPT9904X
Description
The OA_LF is a variable gain single-stage EDFA optimized as an ILA for coherent networks with short
span applications. The amplifier supports up to 96 DWDM channels in the extended C-Band. The card
occupies one slot in the platforms and in addition to ILA can also be utilized in Booster or Preamp
applications.
The OA_LF is an EDFA optimized for coherent networks that do not require DCF support.
The OA_LF amplifier structure is very similar to the OA_L; for a detailed description of the signal path in
the amplifier see OA_L.
Functions
Variable gain optical amplification (15-28 dB)
High output power (20.5 dBm)
Transient suppression
Output power monitoring point
Single amplification stage
Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
BR detection mechanism
Monitoring and alarms
1510 nm SFP for OSC channel (optional)
Card views
General view
Front panel
NOTE: The EDFA amplifier LED markings are indicated in a rectangle at the lower left
side of the front panel.
Ports
Port name Connector Function
AMP IN LC Amplifier line input connector
AMP OUT LC Amplifier output connector
MON OUT - LC Monitor connector used to connect test equipment (like OPM or OSA);
20dB provides an -20 dB sample from the amplifier output signal.
OSC SFP To house an optional 1510 nm SFP that provides an FE control
communications channel.
LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault
EDFA LEDs
IN Red LED Blinks when the input power signal is missing or is too low for normal
operation (LOS condition). Off when the input signal is normal.
OUT Green LED Lights steadily when the pump laser is on and the output power is
above the preset threshold. Off when the output power is below the
threshold (LOP condition).
BR Orange LED Lights when the level of BR exceeds the preset threshold. Usually this
indicates a disconnection or break in the fiber connected to the AMP
OUT connector.
OSC LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the OSC laser transmits.
F/L Red LED Blinks when the OSC input signal is missing or is too low for normal
operation. Lights when a fault is detected in the OSC path.
Block diagram
10.12.10 OA_HF
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The OA_HF is a variable gain single-stage EDFA optimized as an ILA for coherent networks with long
span applications. The amplifier supports up to 96 DWDM channels in the extended-C-Band. The card
occupies one slot in the platforms and in addition to ILA can also be utilized in Preamp applications.
The OA_HF is an EDFA optimized for coherent networks that do not require DCF support.
The OA_HF amplifier structure is very similar to the OA_M but without the midstage; for a detailed
description of the signal path in the amplifier see OA_M.
Functions
Variable gain optical amplification (25-37 dB)
High output power (20.5 dBm)
Transient suppression
Output power monitoring point
Single amplification stage
Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
BR detection mechanism
Monitoring and alarms
1510 nm SFP for OSC channel (optional)
Card views
General view
Front panel
NOTE: The EDFA amplifier LED markings are indicated in a rectangle at the lower left
side of the front panel.
Ports
LEDs
Block diagram
10.12.11 OA_HFS
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The OA_HFS is a high power variable gain EDFA-based single-slot amplifier, optimized for coherent
networks, which can be used as a booster after ROADM/MXD or ILA modules. The OA_HFS amplifier
is designed for terminal and ROADM sites in E/W configuration, supporting up to 96 DWDM channels,
and including built-in OSC C/T filters. The OA_HFS includes extended tilt support for (future) L-band
integration in 5G networks.
This is the first high power amplifier that can be used as a ROADM pre-amp. To ensure eye safety, the
OA_HFS includes both automatic and manual eye safety mechanisms. If there is a disconnection at
any point in the fiber connecting the pre-amp to the ROADM, the module immediately shuts itself off.
Functions
Variable gain optical amplification (20-35 dB) with automatic gain control
High output power (23 dBm)
ROADM pre-amp functionality
Automatic eye-safety verification
Transient suppression
Output power monitoring point
Single amplification stage
Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
BR detection mechanism
Monitoring and alarms
1510 nm SFP for OSC channel (optional)
Mechanisms for ensuring eye-safety (Class 1M):
Spring-loaded protective cover on the amplifier output connector
BR detection
LOS of signal detection from the far end
Automatic laser shutdown (ALS)
Automatic power reduction (APR)
Built-in C/T filters to support OSC functionality
Monitoring and alarms
1510 nm SFP for OSC channel (optional)
Card views
General view
The OA_HFS is an E/W configured card designed to provide enhanced ALS and APR function to shut
down the amplifier in case of fiber cut. The “LINE IN” (Express In) and “EXP OUT” ports are connected
to one of the fiber directions. An internal photo-diode (PD) on the connection between these ports
facilitates the ALS function; see Automatic laser shutdown.
Front panel
NOTE: The EDFA amplifier LED markings are indicated in a rectangle at the lower left
side of the front panel.
Ports
LEDs
Block diagram
10.12.12 OA_FHBS
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The OA_FHBS is a high power fixed gain EDFA-based amplifier optimized for terminal and ROADM
sites in E/W configuration supporting up to 88 DWDM channels. For safety reasons the OA_FHBS is
designed to operate in E/W configuration, and it includes built-in C/T filters. The card occupies one slot
in the platforms.
Functions
Optical amplification (power and gain control)
Transient suppression
Output power monitoring point
Mechanisms for ensuring eye-safety:
Spring-loaded protective cover on the amplifier output connector
BR detection
LOS of signal detection from the far end
Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)
Built-in C/T filters to support OSC functionality
Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
Monitoring and alarms
1510 nm SFP for OSC channel (optional)
Card views
General view
The OA_FHBS is an E/W configured card designed to provide enhanced ALS function to shut down the
amplifier in case of fiber cut. The “LINE IN” (Express In) and “EXP OUT” ports are connected to one of
the fiber directions. An internal photo-diode (PD) on the connection between these ports facilitates the
ALS function; see Automatic laser shutdown.
Front panel
Ports
LEDs
Block diagram
10.12.13 OA_MHS
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The OA_MHS is a high power variable gain EDFA-based amplifier with MSA, optimized for in-line sites
in regional/LH applications, E/W configuration supporting up to 88 DWDM channels. For safety reasons
the OA_MHS is designed to operate in E/W configurations and it includes built-in C/T filters. The card
occupies one slot in the platforms.
he OA_MHS is an E/W configured card designed to provide enhanced ALS function to shut down the
amplifier in case of fiber cut. The “LINE IN” (Express In) and “EXP OUT” ports are connected to one of
the fiber directions. An internal photo-diode (PD) on the connection between these ports facilitates the
ALS function; see Automatic laser shutdown.
Functions
Optical amplification (power and gain control)
Transient suppression
Output power monitoring point
Two amplification stages
Midstage for connecting a dispersion compensation unit
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
LEDs
10.12.14 OA_HRS
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
Description
The OA_HRS is a Raman optical amplifier especially optimized for long-haul multispan and undersea
applications. OA_HRS is intended for use in conjunction with EDFA amplifiers over G.652, G.654, and
G.655 fibers. It supports multichannel applications capable of amplifying the entire C band, and also
transports the OSC at 1510 nm. For safety reasons the OA_HRS is designed to operate in E/W
configurations and it includes built-in C/T filters. The OA_HRS card occupies a double-wide I/O slot in
Apollo platforms.
The OA_HRS operates in the backward mode. The mode indicates the direction of signal flow relative
to the amplifier line side. Backward mode means that the OA_HRS is located at the receiving end of an
optical span to provide an effect similar to that of using a low noise figure preamplifier before further
amplifying the low-level signals received from the line (C band and OSC) by an EDFA amplifier.
For additional safety information, see Raman amplification principles of operation and High power laser
safety.
Functions
Raman amplification (power and gain control)
Transient suppression
Output power monitoring point
Mechanisms for ensuring eye-safety:
Spring-loaded protective covers on connectors carrying high power signals
BR detection
LOS detection from the far end
ALS
Built-in C/T filters to support OSC functionality
Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
Monitoring and alarms
1510 nm SFP for OSC channel
Card views
General view
Ports
Port name Connector Function
NODE IN LX.5 Connects to a booster amplifier output to the line. This signal passes
through the unit and connects to the LINE OUT connector. Connector is
located behind spring loaded cover for safety
NODE OUT LX.5 Connects the Raman amplifier output to an EDFA amplifier. Connector
is located behind spring loaded cover for safety
MON OUT - LC Monitor connector used to connect test equipment (like OPM or OSA);
20dB provides an -20 dB sample from the Raman amplifier output signal
LINE IN (PUMP E2000 Connects the pump signal output to the line and the line signal to the
OUT) Raman input. Connector is located behind spring loaded cover for
safety
LINE OUT E2000 Connects the line output signal (typically comes from a booster
amplifier). Connector located behind spring loaded cover for safety
OSC 1510 IN LC For connecting the input 1510 nm supervisory channel
OSC 1510 OUT LC For connecting the input 1510 nm supervisory channel
OTDR ACCESS LC For connecting an OTDR device to test the characteristics of the line
fiber
LEDs
10.12.15 OA_EHRS
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The OA_EHRS is a hybrid Raman/EDFA optical amplifier, providing optimized high dynamic gain (23 to
37 dB), designed for DCF-less coherent networks. It combines a distributed low-noise Raman
amplification and high-power EDFA amplification in a single module, providing low-noise figure, wide
gain, and high output power, while improving the system OSNR. The OA_EHRS is intended for use
over G.652, G.654, and G.655 fibers. It supports multichannel applications capable of amplifying the
entire C band, and also transmits the OSC on 1528 nm (ITU-T Ch. 62). For safety reasons the
OA_EHRS is designed to operate in E/W configurations and it includes special built-in C/T filters and
OSC SFP (1528 nm) that provide an enhanced safety mechanism and enable controlled Raman
operation. The OA_EHRS card occupies a double I/O slot in Apollo platforms.
The Raman section of the OA_EHRS operates in the backward mode. The mode indicates the direction
of signal flow relative to the amplifier line side. Backward mode means that the Raman pumps of the
OA_EHRS are located at the receiving end of an optical span to provide an effect similar to that of
using a low noise figure preamplifier before further amplifying the low-level signals received from the
line (C band and OSC) by the EDFA section of the OA_EHRS amplifier.
To ensure high reliability, the connectivity of the Raman amplifier output pump to the fibers is first
checked, before full output power is allowed, using built-in special software commands.
Functions
Combines a Backward Raman amplification and an Erbium-based amplification in a single module
Low NF (Noise Figure) across the entire C-Band
High dynamic gain (23 to 37 dB)
High output power (up to 20.5 dB ambient suppression
Gain and tilt control
Output power monitoring point
Built-in SFP OSC operating on 1528 nm (ITU-T Ch. 62) at 100 Mbps
Mechanisms for ensuring eye-safety:
Spring-loaded protective covers on connectors carrying high power signals
BR detection
LOS detection from the far end
OSC signal detection
Built-in C/T filters for 1528 nm (ITU-T Ch. 62) to support OSC functionality
Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
Monitoring and alarms
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
Port name Connector Function
EXP IN LX.5 Connect to counter-propagating signal.
AMP OUT LX.5 Connect to amplified signal output.
MON OUT - LC Monitor connector used to connect test equipment (like OPM or OSA);
20dB provides a -20 dB sample from the amplifier output signal.
LINE IN (PUMP E2000HP For connecting the pump signal output to the line input fiber and the line
OUT) input signal to Raman input.
LINE OUT E2000HP For connecting the line output signal to the line output fiber.
LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no fault
in the OA_EHRS.
Block diagram
10.12.16 OA_HRSF
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The OA_HRSF is a Raman amplifier card that provides low-noise amplification for Apollo networks. It
provides a mean to improve the system OSNR, but specifically employed on ultra-long links (>40dB
loss). In addition, the Raman amplifier cards enable the generation and termination of the optical
supervision channel (OSC). The OSC is an optical channel at 1528 nm that operates at 2 Mbps and
carries management data between optical network nodes. For eye-safety reasons, operation of the 2
Mbps OSC channel is essential.
The gain of the amplifier depends on the fiber type and fiber quality, connected to the Line input port:
for G.652/654 it's 11 to 14 dB; for G.655 it's 13 to 16 dB.
OA_HRSF is intended for use in conjunction with EDFA amplifiers over G.652, G.654, and G.655 fibers.
It supports multichannel applications capable of amplifying the entire C band, supports Flex-Grid, and
also transports the OSC at 1528 nm. For safety reasons the OA_HRSF is designed to operate in E/W
configurations and it includes built-in C/T filters. The OA_HRSF also includes an OTDR filter to enable
monitoring of the fiber span.
The OA_HRSF operates in the backward mode. The mode indicates the direction of signal flow relative
to the amplifier line side. Backward mode means that the OA_HRSF is located at the receiving end of
an optical span to provide an effect similar to that of using a low noise figure preamplifier before further
amplifying the low-level signals received from the line by an EDFA amplifier.
The OA_HRSF occupies a double (long) slot in the OPT96xx platforms.
Functions
Output power monitoring point
OSC termination (2 Mbps)
OSC add and drop
Mechanisms for ensuring eye-safety:
Spring-loaded protective covers on connectors carrying high power signals
BR detection
LOS detection from the far end
ALS
Built-in C/T filters to support OSC functionality
OTDR port to enable monitoring of the fiber span
Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
Monitoring and alarms
1528 nm SFP for OSC channel
For additional safety information, see Raman amplification principles of operation and High power laser
safety.
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
LEDs
Block diagram
10.12.17 OA_EHRSF
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The OA_EHRSF is a hybrid Raman/EDFA optical amplifier supporting operation in Flex-Grid, for both
ILA and pre-amp configurations in DCF-less coherent networks. It combines a distributed low-noise
Raman amplification and a high-gain, high-power EDFA amplification in a single module, providing low-
noise figure, high gain, and high output power, while improving the system OSNR. The OA_EHRSF is
intended for use over G.652, G.654, and G.655 fibers. It supports multichannel applications capable of
amplifying the entire C band, and also transmits the OSC on 1528 nm. For safety reasons the
OA_EHRSF is designed to operate in E/W configurations and it includes special built-in C/T filters and
OSC SFP (1528 nm) that provide an enhanced safety mechanism and enable controlled Raman
operation. The OA_EHRSF card occupies a double I/O slot in Apollo platforms.
The Raman section of the OA_EHRSF operates in the backward mode. The mode indicates the
direction of signal flow relative to the amplifier line side. Backward mode means that the Raman pumps
of the OA_EHRSF are located at the receiving end of an optical span to provide an effect similar to that
of using a low noise figure preamplifier before further amplifying the low-level signals received from the
line by the EDFA section of the OA_EHRSF amplifier. The OA_EHRSF also includes an OTDR filter to
enable monitoring of the fiber span.
To ensure high reliability, the connectivity of the Raman amplifier output pump to the fibers is first
checked, before full output power is allowed, using built-in special software commands.
Functions
Combines a Backward Raman amplification and an Erbium-based amplification in a single module
Supports operation in Flex-Grid
Low NF (Noise Figure) across the entire C-Band
High dynamic gain (19 to 37 dB)
High output power (up to 20.5 dBm)
Transient suppression
Gain and tilt control
Output power monitoring point
Built-in SFP OSC operating on 1528 nm, at 100 Mbps
Mechanisms for ensuring eye-safety:
Spring-loaded protective covers on connectors carrying high power signals
BR detection
LOS detection from the far end
OSC signal detection
Built-in C/T filters for 1528 nm to support OSC functionality
OTDR port to enable monitoring of the fiber span
Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
Monitoring and alarms
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
LEDs
Block diagram
10.12.18 OA_LEHRSF
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The OA_LEHRSF is a hybrid Raman/EDFA optical amplifier supporting operation in Flex-Grid, for both
ILA and pre-amp configurations in DCF-less coherent networks. These amplifiers are optimized for low-
gain 100/200G coherent regional and long-haul in-line sites to increase network reach, providing
optimized dynamic gain for short spans (15 to 26 dB).
The OA_LEHRSF combines a distributed low-noise Raman amplification and a high-power EDFA
amplification in a single module, providing low-noise figure, wide gain, and high output power, while
improving the system OSNR. The OA_LEHRSF is intended for use over G.652, G.654, and G.655
fibers. It supports multichannel applications capable of amplifying the entire C band, and also transmits
the OSC on 1528 nm. For safety reasons the OA_LEHRSF is designed to operate in E/W
configurations and it includes special built-in C/T filters and OSC SFP (1528 nm) that provide an
enhanced safety mechanism and enable controlled Raman operation. The OA_LEHRSF card occupies
a double I/O slot in Apollo platforms.
The Raman section of the OA_LEHRSF operates in the backward mode. The mode indicates the
direction of signal flow relative to the amplifier line side. Backward mode means that the Raman pumps
of the OA_LEHRSF are located at the receiving end of an optical span to provide an effect similar to
that of using a low noise figure preamplifier before further amplifying the low-level signals received from
the line by the EDFA section of the OA_LEHRSF amplifier. The OA_LEHRSF also includes an OTDR
filter to enable monitoring of the fiber span.
To ensure high reliability, the connectivity of the Raman amplifier output pump to the fibers is first
checked, before full output power is allowed, using built-in special software commands.
Functions
Combines a Backward Raman amplification and an Erbium-based amplification in a single module
Supports operation in Flex-Grid
Low NF (Noise Figure) across the entire C-Band
Optimized dynamic gain for short spans (15 to 26 dB)
High output power (up to 20.5 dBm)
Transient suppression
Gain and tilt control
Output power monitoring point
Built-in SFP OSC operating on 1528 nm, at 100 Mbps
Mechanisms for ensuring eye-safety:
Spring-loaded protective covers on connectors carrying high power signals
BR detection
LOS detection from the far end
OSC signal detection
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
Port name Connector Function
EXP IN LX.5 Connect to counter-propagating signal.
AMP OUT LX.5 Connect to amplified signal output.
MON OUT - LC Monitor connector used to connect test equipment (like OPM or OSA);
20dB provides a -20 dB sample from the amplifier output signal.
LINE IN (PUMP E2000HP For connecting the pump signal output to the line input fiber and the line
OUT) input signal to Raman input.
LINE OUT E2000HP For connecting the line output signal to the line output fiber.
OTDR 1610 LC To connect an OTDR device to test the characteristics of the line fiber.
LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no fault
in the OA_LEHRSF.
Block diagram
10.12.19 OA_USPBF
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The OA_USPBF is a high-gain power booster amplifier with an output power of 26 dBm. It can be used
in dispersion-managed 10G networks, cascaded to MSA ILA, or in DCF-less coherent networks,
cascaded to non-MSA ILA. The OA_USPBF supports multichannel applications and is capable of
amplifying the Extended-C-band.
For safety reasons the OA_USPBF is designed to operate in E/W configurations and includes a special
built-in C/T filter for the OSC signal. The OSC signal can be connected from another amplifier or from
an OSC_8 card. For additional safety information, see High power laser safety and Automatic laser
shutdown.
The OA_USPBF occupies a double I/O slot in Apollo platforms.
The OA_USPBF is an E/W configured card designed to provide enhanced ALS function to shut down
the amplifier in case of fiber cut. The “LINE IN” and “LINE OUT” ports are connected to one of the fiber
directions. An internal photo-diode (PD) on the connection between these ports facilitates the ALS
function (for a detailed description see Automatic Laser Shutdown). A comprehensive APR system
complements the eye-safety mechanisms of the card (see Automatic Power Reduction).
NOTE: The OA_USPBF operation requires this amplifier type at both span ends.
Functions
Low NF (Noise Figure) across the Extended-C-Band
Optimized fixed gain (5 to 7 dB)
High output power (up to 26 dBm)
Transient suppression
Gain and tilt control
Output power monitoring point
Mechanisms for ensuring eye-safety:
Spring-loaded protective covers on connectors carrying high power signals
BR detection
Automatic Laser Shutdown (ALS)
Automatic Power Reduction (APR)
LOS detection from the far end
OSC signal detection
Built-in C/T filters for 1510 nm to support OSC functionality
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the OA_USPBF.
AMP IN LED
Blinks when the AMP IN input signal is missing or below the preset
LOS Red LED
threshold.
LINE LEDs
ALS Orange LED Lights when the ALS protection mechanism is activated. Usually, this
indicates a disconnection in the fiber connected to the amplifier output.
APR Green LED Lights when the APR protection mechanism is activated. This occurs
when there is high back reflection and the amplifier's output power is
above the allowed threshold.
OUT BR Orange LED Lights when the level of BR amplifier output signal exceeds a preset
threshold. Usually, this indicates a disconnection or break in the fiber
connected to the amplifier output (LINE OUT) connector.
OUT ON Green LED Lights when the output power of the amplifier is above the threshold level.
IN LOS Red LED Lights when there is no input signal, or the signal to the LINE IN connector
is under a preset threshold. Usually, this indicates a disconnection or
break in the fiber connected from the far side, or no output power from the
amplifier at the far side.
10.12.20 OA_DLF
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
OPT9904X
Description
The OA_DLF is a dual EDFA card that includes two independent EDFA amplifiers in a single package.
The two EDFAs are defined as pre-amp and Booster amplifiers. The pre-amp EDFA amplifies the
optical signal received from the line, and the Booster amplifies the light transmitted to the line. The pre-
amp EDFA in the OA_DLF is optimized for medium-span applications.
For safety reasons the OA_DLF is designed to operate in E/W configurations and includes built-in C/T
filters. The card occupies one slot in the OPT96xx platforms and includes an 1510nm OSC filter and a
pluggable 100 Mbps 1510nm OSC SFP.
The OA_DLF card operates over the extended C-band spectral range.
Functions
Includes two independent EDFA modules
Single-slot card for the OPT96xx family
Accommodate an 100 Mbps 1510 nm OSC SFP
Built-in E-W C/T filters to support OSC functionality
Operates in Bi-directional configuration to support safety
Optical amplification (power and gain control)
Transient suppression
Monitoring and alarms
OSC termination (optional)
Extended C-band (96 channels) operation
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
LEDs
Block diagram
10.12.21 OA_DLHF
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
OPT9904X
Description
The OA_DLHF is a dual EDFA card that includes two independent EDFA amplifiers in a single
package. The two EDFAs are defined as pre-amp and booster amplifiers. The pre-amp EDFA amplifies
the optical signal received from the line, and the Booster amplifies the light transmitted to the line. The
pre-amp EDFA in the OA_DLHF is optimized for long-span applications.
For safety reasons the OA_DLHF is designed to operate in E/W configurations and it includes built-in
C/T filters. The card occupies one slot in the OPT96xx platforms and includes an 1510nm OSC filter
and a pluggable 100 Mbps 1510nm OSC SFP.
The OA_DLHF card operates over the extended C-band spectral range.
Functions
Includes two independent EDFA modules
Booster 15-28dB
Pre-amplifier 25-37dB
Single-slot card for the OPT96xx family and for the OPT9904X
Accommodate an 100 Mbps 1510 nm OSC SFP
Built-in E-W C/T filters to support OSC functionality
Operates in Bi-directional configuration to support safety
Optical amplification (power and gain control)
Transient suppression
Monitoring and alarms
OSC termination (optional)
Extended C-band (96 channels) operation
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
LEDs
Block diagram
10.12.22 OA_DVLF
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
OPT9904X
Description
The OA_DVLF is a dual EDFA card that includes two independent EDFA amplifiers in a single package.
The two EDFAs are defined as pre-amp and booster amplifiers. The pre-amp EDFA amplifies the
optical signal received from the line, and the booster amplifies the light transmitted to the line. The pre-
amp EDFA in the OA_DVLF is optimized for short-span applications.
For safety reasons the OA_DVLF is designed to operate in E/W configurations and it includes built-in
C/T filters. The card occupies one slot in the OPT96xx and OPT9904X platforms and includes an
1510nm OSC filter and a pluggable 100 Mbps 1510nm OSC SFP.
The OA_DVLF card operates over the extended C-band spectral range.
Functions
Includes two independent EDFA modules
Booster 14-21dB
Pre-amplifier 8-18dB
Single-slot card for the OPT96xx family and for the OPT9904X
Accommodate an 100 Mbps 1510 nm OSC SFP
Built-in E-W C/T filters to support OSC functionality
Operates in bi-directional configuration to support safety
Optical amplification (power and gain control)
Transient suppression
Monitoring and alarms
OSC termination (optional)
Extended C-band (96 channels) operation
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
LEDs
Block diagram
10.12.23 OA_DPR
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The OA_DPR is a low-cost Red Band, dual EDFA card that includes two independent EDFA amplifiers
in a single package. The two EDFAs are defined as pre-amp and Booster amplifiers. It can operate only
in the Red Band (ITU-T Ch. 21 to Ch. 36) and support 16 (100 GHz spacing), or 32 channels (50 GHz
spacing).
The OA_DPR is designed to operate in E/W configurations and includes built-in C/T filters. The card
occupies one slot in the OPT96xx platforms and includes an 1510nm OSC filter and a pluggable 100
Mbps 1510nm OSC SFP.
Functions
Includes two independent EDFA modules
Single-slot card for the OPT96xx family
Accommodate an 100 Mbps 1510 nm OSC SFP
Supports 16 or 32 channels in the Red Band
Built-in E-W C/T filters to support OSC functionality
Operates in Bi-directional configuration to support safety
Optical amplification (power and gain control)
Transient suppression
Monitoring and alarms
OSC termination (optional)
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
LEDs
Block diagram
10.12.24 OA_DFBL
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
OPT9904X
Description
The OA_DFBL is a dual EDFA card that includes two independent EDFA amplifiers in a single package.
The two EDFAs are defined as pre-amp and Booster amplifiers. The pre-amp EDFA amplifies the
optical signal received from the line, and the Booster amplifies the light transmitted to the line. The card
is optimized for Metro applications with up to 44 channels.
For safety reasons the OA_DFBL is designed to operate in E/W configurations and it includes built-in
C/T filters. The card occupies one slot in the OPT96xx platforms and includes an 1510nm OSC filter
and a pluggable 100 Mbps 1510nm OSC SFP.
The pre-amp EDFA is a 16 dBm VGA (Variable Gain Amplifier), while the Booster is a 20 dBm FGA
(Fixed Gain Amplifier).
Functions
Includes two independent EDFA modules
Single-slot card for the OPT96xx family and for the OPT9904X
Accommodate an 100 Mbps 1510 nm OSC SFP
Built-in E-W C/T filters to support OSC functionality
Operates in Bi-directional configuration to support safety
Optical amplification (power and gain control)
Monitoring and alarms
OSC termination (optional)
Reduced C-band ( channels)
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
LEDs
Block diagram
10.12.25 OPA_FBS
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
OPT9904X
The OPA_FBS pluggable booster amplifier is used in these platforms when installed within a
ROADM_4FS module.
Description
The OPA_FBS is a pluggable CFP2 form-factor amplifier, hosted by the ROADM_4FS module, for use
as a booster in the designated booster module slot. The OPA_FBS is a 20.5dBm single-stage variable
gain pluggable EDFA that operates over the extended C-band. The operating gain range is 15 to 28dB.
A 1510nm OSC channel may be added via the OSCin port.
Functions
Variable gain booster amplifier (15-28 dB)
High output power (20.5 dBm)
Transient suppression
Output power monitoring point
Single amplification stage
Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
Monitoring and alarms
1510 nm add OSC filter built-in
Amplifier indicators
10.12.26 OPA_VLFS
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
OPT9904X
The OPA_VLFS pluggable very low-gain pre-amplifier is used in these platforms when installed within a
ROADM_4FS module.
Description
The OPA_VLFS is a pluggable CFP2 form-factor amplifier, hosted by the ROADM_4FS module, for use
as a very low-gain pre-amp in the designated pre-amp module slot. The OPA_VLFS is a 20.5dBm
single-stage variable gain pluggable EDFA that operates over the extended C-band. The operating gain
range is 8 to 18dB. A 1510nm OSC channel may be dropped via the OSCout port.
Functions
Variable gain pre-amplifier (8-18 dB)
High output power (20.5 dBm)
Transient suppression
Output power monitoring point
Single amplification stage
Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
Monitoring and alarms
1510 nm drop OSC filter built-in
Amplifier indicators
10.12.27 OPA_LFS
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
OPT9904X
The OPA_LFS pluggable low-gain pre-amplifier is used in these platforms when installed within a
ROADM_4FS module.
Description
The OPA_LFS is a pluggable CFP2 form-factor amplifier, hosted by the ROADM_4FS module, for use
as a low-gain pre-amp in the designated pre-amp module slot. The OPA_LFS is a 20.5dBm single-
stage variable gain pluggable EDFA that operates over the extended C-band. The operating gain range
is 15 to 28dB. A 1510nm OSC channel may be dropped via the OSCout port.
Functions
Variable gain pre-amplifier (15-28 dB)
High output power (20.5 dBm)
Transient suppression
Output power monitoring point
Single amplification stage
Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
Monitoring and alarms
1510 nm drop OSC filter built-in
Amplifier indicators
10.12.28 OPA_HFS
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
OPT9904X
The OPA_HFS pluggable high-gain pre-amplifier is used in these platforms when installed within a
ROADM_4FS module.
Description
The OPA_HFS is a pluggable CFP2 form-factor amplifier, hosted by the ROADM_4FS module, for use
as a high-gain pre-amp in the designated pre-amp module slot. The OPA_HFS is a 20.5dBm single-
stage variable gain pluggable EDFA that operates over the extended C-band. The operating gain range
is 25 to 37dB. A 1510nm OSC channel may be dropped via the OSCout port.
Functions
Variable gain pre-amplifier (25-37 dB)
High output power (20.5 dBm)
Transient suppression
Output power monitoring point
Single amplification stage
Full PM by means of management stations, including monitoring of optical power levels and pump
current
Monitoring and alarms
1510 nm drop OSC filter built-in
Amplifier indicators
Operation of an OTDR can be simple, however it requires familiarity with fiber testing best practices to
perform good, reliable tests. OTDR traces can be analyzed and well interpreted only by trained and
experienced people. An intelligent software application, integrated into the device, can help technicians
use an OTDR more effectively, without the need to understand or interpret OTDR traces. The user only
sets the fiber span distance and the system automatically determines the pulse width, resolution, and
acquisition time.
NOTES:
OTDR operation requires OTDR SFPs at both span ends
The total span loss should not be more than 15 dB
3. The “Reference list” that shows the location (in km) of high-reflection points is retrieved.
4. Compare the furthest reported point with the “Reference list” created by the last “calibration test”:
a. If the “furthest reported point” is different from any of the points in the “Reference list” by at
least +/-25 m – it will be considered as a “fiber cut” and its location will be reported to the
management station. )
b. If the “furthest reported point” is equal to one of the reference points +/-25m, the “furthest
reported point” will be reported as the fiber cut with the following warning note:
“Warning: Inconclusive results!!!
Fiber cut is indicated at a reference point”.
c. If no reflection point was detected a “No information” note will be reported.
d. If no “Reference list” exist (for example, because a calibration test was not performed)
“furthest point” will be reported with the following warning:
“Warning: Inconclusive results!!!
Calibration test has not been performed“.
e. In case of time-out or any other hardware failure the message “OTDR test failed” will be
reported.
5. The SFP returns to normal operation as an OSC in less than 15 sec.
The test results are displayed on the management station as "Distance to fiber cut” in units of meter.
The user can read the reflection points detected by the last OTDR test by a debug command.
10.13.3 OTDR_8
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
OPT9904X
Description
The Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) is an optoelectronic device used to test the
characteristic of an optical fiber. The OTDR injects a series of optical pulses into the tested fiber and
examines the light scattered or reflected back from the end of the fiber. The strength of the return
pulses is measured and integrated as a function of time.
The OTDR_8 is a double-slot card that includes an integrated OTDR module with an 1610 nm laser and
an 1 x 8 optical switch. You can select one out of eight fibers connected to the card.
Features
Various OTDR tests including:
Manual - initiated by the user
Scheduled - configured by the user to perform periodic test (Daily, Weekly, Monthly, etc.)
Automatic - initiated by the system management (LightSOFT) in case a LOS is detected
Saves a reference test for each fiber as a baseline to evaluate test results
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
LEDs
10.13.4 OTDR1610_8S
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR) is an optoelectronic device used to test the
characteristic of an optical fiber. The OTDR injects a series of optical pulses into the tested fiber and
examines the light scattered or reflected back from the end of the fiber. The strength of the return
pulses is measured and integrated as a function of time.
The OTDR1610_8S is a single-slot card that includes an integrated OTDR module with a 1610 nm laser
and a 1 x 8 optical switch. You can select one out of eight fibers connected to the card.
Features
Various OTDR tests including:
Manual - initiated by the user
Scheduled - configured by the user to perform periodic test (Daily, Weekly, Monthly, etc.)
Automatic - initiated by the system management (LightSOFT) in case a LOS is detected
Saves a reference test for each fiber as a baseline to evaluate test results
Raises alarms in case of fiber-cut or fiber-degradation compared to a reference test
Provides a visualized OTDR GUI in LightSOFT
Built-in intelligent software helps technicians use the OTDR more effectively
Light pulse operates at 1610 nm (outside the C-band) to enable in-service tests
Includes an 1610 nm passive filter to reject ASE noise (created by stimulated Raman)
1 x 8 optical switch enables to connect up to eight fibers (one at a time)
Saves records of test history in LightSOFT database
In-service and out-of-service tests
Pre-Raman test - enables evaluation of fiber quality to be connected to a Raman
Range of 1 km to 250 km (in 1 km steps) with a default value of 80 km
A simplified block diagram of the OTDR module is shown in the following figure.
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
LEDs
CAUTION: You can run OTDR tests in networks including Raman amplifiers only when
the Raman is not active.
In general, connecting an OTDR to a fiber doesn't affect traffic. However, traffic may affect the OTDR
signal and may cause inaccurate test results. Therefore, the OTDR modules include an internal 1610
nm passive filter that rejects ASE noise at 1610 nm (generated by stimulated Raman lasers).
In addition, to prevent other types of traffic from affecting test results, the OTDR module is connected to
the tested fiber through OTDR filters. Two types of OTDR filter cards are offered:
CT_OTDR_2 : Used in applications where the OTDR, C-Band, and OSC signals are separate
from each other
C_OTDR_2 : Used in applications where the C-Band and OSC signals are combined and the
OTDR signal is separate
OTDR operation is based on a light pulse sent into the fiber. The pulse width determines its power; the
wider the pulse, the stronger the power it carries. To be able to test long span fibers, we need a wide
pulse; on the other hand, a wide pulse reduces the resolution of the OTDR test results. The optimal
pulse width to select would be a compromise between these contradictory requirements. In addition, the
width of the pulse generates an error area of several meters within the test results, called the dead-
zone. This error can't be observed by the OTDR module. To improve the accuracy of test results, a
built-in 30 m fiber is connected inside the OTDR module.
The OTDR connection is typical for -20 dBm EDFA amplifiers fiber testing:
The user connects the OTDR to the fiber span under test via OTDR filter (CT_OTDR_2 or
C_otdr_2) card
The OTDR test parameters are automatically set according to the span’s length
The test enables monitoring of both transmit and receive fibers from a single end
A Reference Test is performed, and stored as an expected baseline
The user can set more manual or periodic tests
If fiber cut or fiber-degradation is detected compared to the reference test, alarms are raised by
the system
10.14 DCF
Apollo offers a variety of DCF cards to properly compensate for chromatic dispersion. To select the
optimal solution for specific installations, the following cards are available, differing mainly in their
compensation capabilities.
DCF652_xx
DCF655_xx
RM_DCF652_xx
10.14.1 DCF652_xx
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Artemis 1P/2PE/2A/4A
Description
The DCF652_xx is a single-slot DCF card that is suitable for G. 652 compliant fibers. The card is
available for compensation for various distances (5, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 110, or
120 km). The marking xx in the name of the card indicates the compensated distance in km. All
connections to the card are through LC type connectors on the front panel.
Card views
General view
Front panel
10.14.2 DCF655_xx
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
Artemis 2A/4A
Description
The DCF655_xx is a double-wide-slot DCF card that is suitable for G. 655 compliant fibers. The card is
available for compensation for various distances (40 km, 80 km, or 120 km). The marking xx in the
name of the card indicates the compensated distance in km. All connections to the card are through LC
type connectors on the front panel.
Card views
DCF655_xx general view
10.15 OSC_8
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The OSC_8 is a single-slot optical supervisory channel (OSC) card that provides up to eight OSC
management channels for the Apollo system. The OSC_8 provides the following main functions:
Eight OSC SFP-based ports providing support for both 1510 nm and 1310 nm links as detailed in
the ports table that follows.
Interoperability with Apollo optical amplifier OSC ports.
Up to two cards in Apollo platforms.
Card views
General view
Front panel
LEDs
Ports
OTN hierarchy
The main benefits of ODU0 are that this is a switchable entity that is consistent with other ODUk signals
and is optimized for efficient transport of most sub-ODU1 clients. The ODU0 structure is similar to other
OTN containers, including three main areas:
Overhead area for Operation, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning (OAM&P) functions
Payload area for customers data
Forward Error Correction (FEC) data
Since the payload area of an ODU0 container (half of ODU1) is not enough to transparently transport
GbE, a transcoding method is specified. The 1000BaseX signal (8B/10B coded, nominal bit rate of
1,250,000 kbit/s and a bit-rate tolerance up to +100 ppm) is synchronously mapped into a 75-octet
GFP-T frame stream with a bit rate of 15/16 x 1,250,000 kbit/s +100 ppm (approximately
1,171,875 kbit/s +100 ppm). This process is referred to as timing transparent transcoding (TTT). The
15/16 x 1,250,000 kbit/s +100 ppm signal is then mapped into an OPU0 by means of the generic
mapping procedure (GMP). GMP was also chosen for use when mapping new client signals into OPU1,
OPU2, and OPU3 signals. The main reason for the introduction of GMP is the limited ability of AMP to
conveniently accommodate new client signals with rates that are significantly different than the OPUk
payload rates, or to handle client signals with a clock tolerance significantly greater than +20 ppm.
To map an ODUflex into a higher order ODUk, the appropriate number of higher order OPUk time slots
is allocated. The selection is arbitrary, but all time slots should be part of the same ODUk. The mapping
of the ODUflex into the ODUk is made through GMP, since both the ODUflex rate and the allocated
time slot rate can vary.
Another application of ODUflex is transport of GFP-encapsulated packet streams, like Ethernet and
MPLS-TP, providing resizable tunnels between L2/L3 switch fabric. The ODUflex make most efficient
use of the OTN bandwidth when configured in exact multiples of the lowest ODTUk.1 in the network.
It might be tempting to consider ODUflex as a generic solution for all CBR client mapping. However,
this is not always reasonable, since client signals with a rate close enough to an existing ODUk can be
mapped more efficiently directly into this ODUk. ODUflex is only preferred if it will occupy fewer time
slots than the smallest fixed-rate ODUk capable of fitting the client signal.
In the current version of Apollo only ODUflex for CBR is supported and only the AoCB card is
supported.
Description
The AoC10/AoC10B provides 10 Gbps ADM service on a single-slot card. It supports up to 16 client
interfaces, which are multiplexed into the G.709 multiplexing structure and sent via two OTU2 line
interfaces.
Any of the client interfaces can be configured to accept an STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, GbE,
FC/FC2/FC4, OTU-1, STM-16/OC-48, DVB-ASI, SDI, or HD-SDI signal. The card has integrated
cross-connect capabilities, providing more efficient utilization of the lambda. Any of the signals can be
added or dropped at each site, while the rest of the traffic continues on to the next site. Broadcast TV
services can be dropped and continued (duplicated), eliminating the need for external equipment to
provide this functionality.
Features
16 SFP-based client ports, software configurable to support GbE, 1G FC, 2G FC, 4G FC, STM-
1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, STM-16/OC-48, and OTU1 services
Two independent XFP-based OTU2 line ports
Supports new tunable XFP transceivers
Can be used as a multi-rate combiner up to OTU2
Can operate as two separate muxponders with sets of eight clients multiplexed into one OTU2 line
Supports GFEC, EFEC (I.4 and I.7), and ignore-FEC modes towards the line
Provides GFEC on the client side when it is configured to OTU1
GCC features:
GCC supported in standard (full rate) mode.
Up to 2 GCC channels for OTU2/OTU2e supported.
One GCC supported per port, configurable to either GCC0, GCC1, or GCC2, user selectable.
Supports Subnetwork Connection Protection (SNCP) mechanisms
Complies with ITU-T standards for 50 GHz and 100 GHz multichannel spacing (DWDM)
Supports in-service module insertion and removal without any effect on other active ports
Supports interoperability with XDM AoC cards
IMPORTANT: The AoC10B card is very similar to the AoC10. Both cards support the
same functionality except for the following OTN features, supported only by the AoC10B.
Card views
General view
Front panel
The port number is indicated under/above each port. The markings T (transmit) and R (receive) near
each port indicate only the port's output and input connections and don't relate to the port LEDs.
Usage guidelines
Several limitations apply when configuring AoC10B/AoC10 ports to specific rates from V8.2 and on.
These limitations are described in the following table. X in the table indicates the allowed (supported)
configuration option.
Rate
FC-4 X X X X
STM-16/ FC2G/OTU1/HD-SDI X X X X X X X X
STM-1/4/GBE/FC- X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
1G/DVB/SDI
STM-16/ FC2G/OTU1/HD-SDI port assignment is rejected if the following odd port is assigned.
When an STM-16/ FC2G/OTU1/HD-SDI port is assigned, an assignment to the following odd port
is rejected.
When an FC-4 port is assigned, 3 following port assignments are rejected and an FC-4 port
cannot be assigned if any of the 3 following ports are already assigned.
Any assignment of a client that requires more than the allocated BW of 20G is rejected.
When an HD-SDI port is assigned, the two ports following it must remain empty. The third one can
be assigned to a port type occupying an ODU0, for example ETY1G.
LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no fault
in the AoC10/AoC10B.
The two Line ports (port 16 and 17) are disabled in this mode, and only the 16 client ports are used.
The first eight ports (Port 0 to Port 7) are configured as Client ports, and the last eight (Port 8 to Port
15), as Line ports.
The AoC25 provides the following main features:
8 x SFP-based client ports, software configurable to support GbE, 1G FC, 2G FC, STM-1/OC-3,
STM-4/OC-12, and STM-16/OC-48 services
8 x SFP-based line ports configured to ODU1
Quadruple OTU1 muxponder (two client ports connected to a single line port)
Y-protected Quadruple OTU1 muxponder (two client ports connected to a double line ports)
8 x OTU1 transponder card (one client connected to a single line port)
Y-protected Quadruple OTU1 transponder (one client connected to a double line ports)
The following rules apply for assignment of the client ports (Port 0 to Port 7) and Line ports (Port 8 to
Port15):
Port 0 to Port 7 can be assigned as clients only.
Assignment of the client ports to OTU1 will be rejected.
Ports 0 and 1, 2 and 3, 4 and 5, 6 and 7 are couples.
If a member of a couple is assigned to a port type occupying ODU-slot, the second member can't
be assigned to a type occupying ODU1.
All cross-connects must be explicitly configured by the user.
11.3 TR10_4
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The TR10_4 is a single-slot 10 Gbps transponder card that maps the client signal according to G.709
and transmits a colored signal towards the network. The card includes two transponders (client and
line) providing full functionality in a space saving form factor and operating in an East/West
configuration. Each one can be configured independently for transponder or regenerator applications.
Features
20 Gbps total capacity
Two pairs of independent 10 Gbps transponders (client + line)
Multiservice client interfaces, software configurable, supporting:
10G LAN
GFP extended overhead (OH) mapping to ODU2
BMP mapping to ODU2e (overclocking)
STM-64/OC-192
OTU2/OTU2e
FC800/FC1200
Client signals mapped to OTU2, OTU2e, and OTU2f
Complies with ITU-T standards for 50 GHz and 100 GHz multichannel spacing (DWDM) using
fixed or tunable XFP transceiver
Supports PM and GCC in-band management, with PM for client side signals in the signals' native
layer (SDH/SONET and Ethernet).
GCC features:
GCC supported in standard (full rate) mode.
Up to 2 GCC channels for OTU2/OTU2e supported.
One GCC supported per port, configurable to either GCC0, GCC1, or GCC2, user selectable.
Provides GFEC, EFEC (I.4 and I.7), and no FEC modes towards the line. GFEC is also available
on the client side when it is configured to OTU2 regeneration mode. In addition, the TR10_4 offers
an optional ignore-FEC mode.
Can be configured for the following applications:
Two independent transponders. Services in this mode can be configured as either
unprotected or with full equipment protection.
Y-protected transponder with a single client.
Card views
General view
Front panel
The transponder ports are marked C1 for client and L1 for line for the first transponder and similarly C2
and L2 for the corresponding ports of the second transponder.
LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the TR10_4.
Port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's transmitter
is off.
F/L Red LED Lights steadily when a BIT fault is detected in the pluggable transceiver, or
the supply voltage or temperature is Out of Range (OOR). Blinks when a
LOS condition is detected in the port.
Algorithm (cryptographic): also known as cipher; a mathematical function which uses plaintext as
the input and produces ciphertext as the output and vice versa.
Key: a word or phrase that modifies the encryption/decryption process in such a way that knowledge of
the algorithm alone is insufficient to decipher an enciphered message.
Asymmetric Algorithm: an algorithm in which the key used for encryption is different from that used
for decryption. Also known as public key cryptography.
Symmetric Algorithm: an encryption algorithm where the encryption key is the same as the decryption
key, or where one key is easily calculated from the other. The sender and receiver have to agree on a
key before they can communicate securely.
Private Key: the secret part of a private key/public key pair used in public key cryptography. The
Private Key is normally known only to the key owner. Messages are encrypted using the Public Key and
decrypted using the Private Key. For digital signatures, however, a document is signed with a Private
Key and authenticated with the corresponding Public Key.
Public Key: the encryption key is made public but only the person who holds the corresponding private
key can decrypt the message. This concept was first proposed by Diffie and Hellman in 1975.
Man in the Middle Attack (MIMA): is a form of actively listening to or eavesdropping on network traffic
of one or more computer hosts. In this method, the attacking computer will make an independent
connection with each identified computer host or “victim.” Once establishing these connections, the
computer will then relay messages between the victims creating the illusion of each computer
communicating with the other via a secure connection. This dialogue; however, is fully controlled by the
rogue computer or attacker. In order for the attack to be a true MIMA, 100% of the network traffic has to
be controlled. The attack focuses on the lack of mutual authentication between the two victims.
Message Integrity Check (MIC): a cryptographic algorithm value which is computed on a per-message
basis, to allow the integrity of the message to be validated to prevent the MIMA. For encrypt, it is an
output which is transmitted at the end of each message. For decrypt, it is an input which is compared
against the recomputed value. Essentially, it is a secure checksum.
Authentication: the process of identifying an individual, usually based on a username and password. It
makes sure that the individual at the other end (of the network) is who he or she claims to be.
Authorization: is the process of giving individuals access to system objects based on their identity.
Digital Signature: an encrypted message digest which is appended to a plaintext or encrypted
message to verify the identity of the sender. The signature is encrypted with the user's private key and
can only be decrypted with the corresponding public key. The same key pairs may be used for
signature and encryption purposes but separate key pairs for each purpose are usually recommended.
Digital Certificate: an electronic "passport" that allows a person, computer or organization to exchange
information securely over the Internet using the public key infrastructure.
X.509 certificate: a digital certificate that uses the widely accepted international X.509 public key
infrastructure (PKI) standard to verify that a public key belongs to the user, computer or service identity
contained within the certificate. The certificate includes the following main subjects:
User's ID information
User's public key
Period of validity
Digital signature of the issuer
SSL (Secure Sockets Layer): commonly-used protocol for managing the security of a message
transmission on the Internet. SSL uses a program layer located between the Internet's Hypertext
Transfer Protocol (HTTP) and Transport Control Protocol (TCP) layers.
PKI (Public Key Infrastructure): enables users of a basically unsecure public network such as the
Internet to securely and privately exchange data and money through the use of a public and a private
cryptographic key pair that is obtained and shared through a trusted authority.
CA (Certificate Authority): is an authority in a network that issues and manages security credentials
and public keys for message encryption. CA checks with a registration authority (RA) to verify
information provided by the requestor of a digital certificate. If the RA verifies the requestor's
information, the CA can then issue a certificate.
Advanced Encryption Standard (AES): is an encryption algorithm for securing sensitive but
unclassified material by U.S. It was developed to find a more robust replacement for the Data
Encryption Standard (DES). Its specification includes an symmetric algorithm using block encryption of
128 bits in size, supporting key sizes of 128, 192 and 256 bits.
Internet Key Exchange (IKE): is an IPsec (Internet Protocol Security) standard protocol used to
ensure security for virtual private network (VPN) negotiation and remote host or network access.
Diffie-Hellman key exchange: also called exponential key exchange, is a method of digital encryption
that uses numbers raised to specific powers to produce decryption keys on the basis of components
that are never directly transmitted, making the task of a would-be code breaker mathematically
overwhelming.
Initialization Vector (IV): a cryptographic algorithm input which varies on a per-message basis to
ensure that no two messages of possibly similar data are ever encrypted the same way. The IV is
generated at the encryptor and sent to the decryptor prior to the message – it is not secret. The IV must
be a Nonce “number used once”, for which a simple message counter is sufficient.
11.5 TR10_4EN
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The TR10_4EN is a single-slot 10 Gbps transponder card with encryption capabilities. The card maps
the client signal according to G.709 to OTU2/ODU2e/ODU2f. The encryption is performed at the optical
ODU2/2e layer, using an encryption system and sends it to the line. The encryption system encodes
the data with AES-GCM 256 algorithm to ensure a high security level. In addition to its main role as a
transponder, the TR10_4EN provides encryption on the optical (ODU2/e) layer.
The card includes two separate transponders (client and line) providing full functionality in a space
saving form factor and operating in an East/West configuration. The line traffic at OTU2 is encrypted
using the AES (256 bit) algorithm.
Features
Two pairs of independent 10 Gbps transponders (client + line),for a total capacity of 20 Gbps.
Multiservice client interfaces, software configurable, supporting:
10 GbE.
STM64.
OTU2/OTU2e.
FC800/FC1200.
OC192.
Supports line for OTU2, OTU2e and OTU2f.
FEC support:
Regular FEC on all ports when configured to OTU2/OTU2e/OTU2f (OTU2f only on the line).
EFEC I4 and I7 on all ports when configured to OTU2/OTU2e/OTU2f.
GCC features:
GCC supported in standard (full rate) mode.
Up to 2 GCC channels for OTU2/OTU2e supported.
One GCC supported per port, configurable to either GCC0, GCC1, or GCC2, user selectable.
Support port protection using splitter/coupler and Y protection.
Powerful encryption capabilities:
Wire speed mode with no added latency.
When installed in two NE peers, they can communicate through a secured line at the ODU2
level, using an encrypted line (encryption is AES-GCM 256).
NEs provisioned to support such an encrypted line authenticate each other using
private/public key authentication. Private/Public key is generated by the NE.
NEs provisioned to support an encrypted line exchange symmetric encryption keys for the
encryption algorithm using Diffie-Hellman group 5, 14, and 24 algorithms.
Key management using IKE:
IKE messages can be transmitted using GCC0, GCC1, GCC2, OSC or out of band, like
common management packets. Hitless keys change.
When the Key exchange trigger is sent, in next frame the encrypt and decrypt side uses
the new key.
Implemented encryption algorithms:
AES-GCM 256 – Advanced Encryption Standard, key length 256 bits. The AES algorithm
is a symmetric block cipher that can encrypt and decrypt information.
IV – Initialization Vector. A cryptographic algorithm input which varies on a per-message
basis to ensure that no two messages of possibly similar data are ever encrypted the
same way. The IV is generated at the encryptor and send it to the decryptor prior to the
message – it is not secret. The IV must be a Nonce “number used once”, for which a
simple message counter is sufficient.
MIC – Message Integrity Check. A cryptographic algorithm value computed on a per-
message basis, to allow the integrity of the message to be validated. For encrypt, it is an
output which is transmitted at the end of each message. For decrypt, it is an input which
is compared against the recomputed value. Essentially, it is a secure checksum.
Symmetric keys are rotated periodically to increase security. The period is software
configurable from one minute up to one hour in steps of one minute.
Keys remain synchronized and encrypted traffic experience no hit upon RCP switchover.
Symmetric keys are not equal on both direction (i.e. KeyA-> B is not the same as KeyB->A).
Key rotation doesn't create any traffic hit.
Card encryption logic supports 2 keys in parallel (i.e. Keyn and Keyn+1).
Minor alarm is rise upon a failure on negotiating the symmetric key.
Major alarm is rise when the IV counter is full.
Card views
General view
Front panel
Usage guidelines
Port 0 and port 2, labeled C1 and C2, are client ports only (even in case of OTU2 regenerators)
Ports 1 and 3, labeled L1 and L2, are line ports only.
LEDs
The NE can receive the key pairs (private key + public key) in one of the following two modes:
Full secure (Manual) - the key pairs are created elsewhere and transported to the NE site in
an encrypted file, and then loaded manually through a local craft terminal (LCT).
OR
Automatic - the LCT or STMS instructs the NE to create the key pairs itself using an internal
generator.
In both modes, the NE creates and self-signs its X.509 certificate, that contains its public key.
The private key always remains within the NE in protected non-volatile memory.
NE-A and NE-B use their private keys and each other’s public keys to create a symmetric session
key.
This is done using Diffie-Hellman Group 5, 14, and 24 algorithms.
Symmetric key strength is AES256-GCM.
This session key is used to encrypt the data transported on the WDM channel.
The keys are changed periodically. The time is configurable (typically keys are changed each
hour).
Triggers for protection include extracting the TR10_4EN, line or client SFP+ transceiver, or failure of
SFP+.
Protection at the service level is supported, using splitters/couplers or Y cables (which reduces the cost
of the solution and saves slots in the passive platform).
In addition internal Y protection in a single card is supported as well, using 2 lines and one client on the
same card. The Y protection is activated based on OTN Performance Monitoring (PM) that leads to
signal degrade (SD) or loss of signal (LOS). Only ports C1 L1, and L2 can be configured for this type of
protection.
11.6 TR10_12/TR10_12R
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The TR10_12/TR10_12R is a single-slot 10 Gbps transponder card that maps the client signals
according to G.709 and transmits a colored signal towards the network. The card includes six
transponders (client and line) providing full functionality in a space saving form factor and operating in
an East/West configuration. They can also be configured as six regenerators between the line ports.
NOTE: The TR10_12 card has been designated as end of life, and has been replaced by
the TR10_12R. The same feature description applies to both cards. The TR10_12R is fully
interoperable with the TR10_12; there are no restriction on use of the TR10_12R.
Features
60 Gbps mapping capacity.
Six pairs of independent 10 Gbps transponders (client + line).
Client and line ports based on SFP+.
Supports tunable SFP+ transceivers.
Supports DWDM, CWDM, and non-color transceivers.
Multiservice client interfaces, software configurable to support:
10G LAN
GFP extended overhead (OH) mapping to ODU2
BMP mapping to ODU2e (overclocking)
STM-64/OC-192
OTU2/OTU2e
FC800/FC1200
FC1200 transponder is supported in overclocking mode only with OTU2e line rate.
FC800 transponder is supported mapping the signal to ODUflex.
Line ports configurable to support OTU2 and OTU2e.
Complies with ITU-T standards for 50 GHz and 100 GHz multichannel spacing (DWDM) using
fixed or tunable SFP+ transceiver.
Supports PM and GCC in-band management, with PM for client side signals in the signals' native
layer (SDH/SONET and Ethernet).
GCC features:
GCC supported in standard (full rate) mode.
One GCC supported per port (OTU2/OTU2e), configurable to either GCC0, GCC1, or GCC2,
user selectable.
Provides GFEC and EFEC (I.7) modes towards the line. GFEC is also available on the client side
when it is configured to OTU2 regeneration mode. In addition, the TR10_12/TR10_12R offers an
optional ignore-FEC mode.
Can be configured for the following applications:
Six independent transponders. Services in this mode can be configured as either unprotected
or with full equipment protection.
Y-protected transponder with a single client.
Up to four Y-protected transponders per card.
Six independent regenerators using line ports.
Card views
General view
Front panel
Usage guidelines
The transponder ports are numbered (0) to (11). Each port can be configured as client or line, with a
maximum of six client ports.
Any client port can be configurable to support OTU2/2e B&W or colored (fixed) services.
Any line ports can be configured to OTU2/2e B&W or colored (fixed or tunable) services.
LEDs
11.7 TR10_12ULL
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The TR10_12ULL is a single-slot 10 Gbps transponder card that maps the client signals according to
G.709 and transmits a colored signal towards the network. The card has 12 ports:
Four dedicated for ULL (Ultra Low Latency) transponder channels with very low latency for FC16,
FC12, and ETY10GOC clients.
Eight ports can be configured as four independent transponders
TR10_12ULL includes six transponders (client and line) providing full functionality in a space saving
form factor and operating in an East/West configuration. The eight regular ports can also be configured
as four regenerators between the line ports.
Features
40 Gbps mapping capacity.
Four pairs of independent 10 Gbps transponders (client + line).
Client and line ports based on SFP+.
Supports tunable SFP+ transceivers.
Supports DWDM, CWDM, and non-color transceivers.
Multiservice client interfaces, software configurable to support:
10G LAN.
STM-64/OC-192.
OTU2/OTU2e.
FC800/FC1200.
FC1200 transponder is supported in overclocking mode only with OTU2e line rate.
FC800 transponder is supported mapping the signal to ODUflex.
Line ports configurable to support OTU2 and OTU2e.
Complies with ITU-T standards for 50 GHz and 100 GHz multichannel spacing (DWDM) using
fixed or tunable SFP+ transceiver.
Supports PM and GCC in-band management, with PM for client side signals in the signals' native
layer (SDH/SONET and Ethernet).
GCC features:
GCC supported in standard (full rate) mode.
One GCC supported per port (OTU2/OTU2e), configurable to either GCC0, GCC1, or GCC2,
user selectable.
Provides GFEC and EFEC (I.7) modes towards the line. GFEC is also available on the client side
when it is configured to OTU2 regeneration mode. In addition, the TR10_12ULL offers an optional
ignore-FEC mode.
Can be configured for the following applications:
Four independent transponders. Services in this mode can be configured as either
unprotected or with full equipment protection.
Y-protected transponder with a single client.
Up to two Y-protected transponders per card.
Four independent regenerators using line ports.
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
The transponder ports are numbered (0) to (11). Each port can be configured as client or line, with a
maximum of six client ports. The limitation of six client ports refers to the eight regular ports only, in
addition of the ULL ports.
The following table describes the TR10_12ULL front panel component functionality.
LEDs
The non-colored signal is connected to the SFP+ of port (1) on the TR10_12ULL front panel (that acts
as a "client input"). This SFP+ is connected at the other end to the EDC P4 and switched to P3 at the
opposite side of the EDC; the output of this channel (P3 of the EDC) is directly connected to the second
SFP+ on one side; the other side of the SFP+ is connected to port (3) on the TR10_12ULL front panel.
According to the required application, the second SFP+ is selected at the rate of the corresponding
client input signal (FC1200/FC1600, or 10 GbE LAN) or if a colored signal is required at the output, a
DWDM SFP+ is selected. This application only connects the signal through the SFP+ transceivers and
EDC module without passing the mapper, forming a ULL channel.
The ULL channel is characterized by the following features:
PM is not supported on these ports, only LOS alarm
ULL port has a new sub-interface (dummy) to configure XC
When LOS is detected on one of the ports of the ULL transponder the other port shuts down its
laser
Latency is less than 1 µsec for FC12, FC16, and ETY10GOC clients
The protection scheme for the ULL ports is based on the following principals:
The protected ports are on two cards located in adjacent slots in the platform
The card types are identical
The ports carry identical services
The port numbers on the two cards are identical
The following figure shows a typical protection scheme for the ULL ports.
11.8 CMR40B
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The CMR40B is a double-slot multiservice combiner card that supports 4 x 10G
LAN/STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e aggregation to OTU-3e. It enjoys enhanced noise tolerance with
improved chromatic dispersion tolerance, and offers good bandwidth efficiency. It reduces the number
of wavelengths, increases capacity, and simplifies management, and can be used in both metro/core
and long-haul networks.
The CMR40B uses a coherent receiver and DP-DQPSK modulation format. The client side utilizes
XFPs for 10G interfaces.
Features
4 x client interface ports supporting:
STM-64/OC-192
10 GbE LAN
Overclocking Sup43.7.1
10 GbE WAN
OTU2
OTU2e
FC800
FC1200
Each client signal can be configured independently of the other clients
Fully tunable line side DWDM port supporting up to 88 channels, and available in Dual
Polarization Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (DP-DQPSK) modulation format
Optimized for long-reach transmission over older fiber infrastructures with high PMD
Complies with ITU-T standards for 50 GHz and 100 GHz multichannel spacing (DWDM)
Supports PM and GCC in-band management, with PM for client side signals in the signals' native
layer (SDH/SONET and Ethernet)
GCC features:
GCC supported in standard (full rate) mode.
One GCC supported per port (OTU2/OTU2e), configurable to either GCC0, GCC1, or GCC2,
user selectable.
OTU3e Long haul line with 10% EFEC I.7 (EFEC7_10)
OTU-2 client supports FEC and EFEC7
Full support of RMON on 10 Gbps Ethernet ports
Standard mapping per ITU-T G.709 Rev.3
Payload Type (PT) 21 complies with ITU-T G.709, Edition 3
CD and GDG fiber parameters measured for accurate compensation (can be displayed to the
user)
Supports Client Signal Fail (CSF) alarm for easy client failure identification
Card views
General view
Front panel
Usage guidelines
Client ports are numbered 0 to 3 and labeled C1 to C4. Line port is port number 4 and labeled LINE.
LEDs
Description
The CMR100/CMR100L double-slot combiner (muxponder) interfaces to any combination of ten of the
following client signals through XFPs, and maps them into a 100 Gbps colored line signal for WDM
network transport, according to the G.709 standard: 10GbE/STM64/OC192/FC8/FC10/OTU2/OTU2e. It
occupies a double slot in Apollo platforms.
The CMR100/CMR100L uses DP-QPSK modulation, a coherent receiver, DSP processing, and soft
decision forward error correction, for superior noise tolerance, and an exceptional ability to mitigate CD
and PMD impairments.
The CMR100 is optimized for Ultra Long Haul networking applications, and the CMR100L supports
regional applications. While the TR100L does not support single fiber bi-directional WDM operation, in
terms of all other capabilities, the cards are identical and they are interoperable with each other. The
client side utilizes XFPs for 10G interfaces.
The CMR100/CMR100L offers the following main features:
10 x client interface ports supporting:
STM-64/OC-192
10 GbE LAN
10 GbE WAN
OTU2
OTU2e
FC1200
FC800
Each client signal can be configured independently of the other clients
Fully tunable line side DWDM port supporting up to 88 channels, and available in Non Return to
Zero Diverse Polarization Differential Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (NRZ DP QPSK) modulation
format
Optimized for long reach transmission over older fiber infrastructures with high PMD
Complies with ITU T standards for 50 GHz and 100 GHz multichannel spacing (DWDM)
One stage multiplexing according to latest ITU-T standards
Supports PM and GCC in band management, with PM for client side signals in the signals' native
layer (SDH/SONET and Ethernet)
GCC features:
GCC interoperability with the following cards:
HIO100_2
FIO100/FIO100M
TR100 (100G REG)
TM400 (100G REG)
GCC supported in standard (full rate) mode by default, as well as Apollo proprietary (¼ rate
GCC) reduced mode, user selectable.
Supports up to 5 GCC channels for OTU2/OTU2e in standard mode, 1 GCC channel for
OTU4 in reduced mode.
One GCC supported per port, configurable to either GCC0, GCC1, or GCC2, user selectable.
OTU2 and OTU2e client supports GFEC and EFEC
Line service configured for SD FEC mode
Card views
General view
Front panel
Usage guidelines
The CMR100/CMR100L can be assigned to slots 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, ,14, 16, 18, 20, 22 of OPT9624 or
slots 0, 2, 4, 6 of OPT9608 platforms.
Client ports of CMR100/CMR100L card are numbered 1 to 10 and labeled C1 to C10. Line port is port
number 0 and labeled LINE.
Ports
LED indicators
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations).
Off when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is
no fault in the CMR100/CMR100L.
Client port LEDs (C1-C10)
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Lights steadily when a BIT fault is detected in the pluggable
transceiver, or the supply voltage or temperature is OOR. Blinks when
a LOS condition is detected in the port.
Line LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
LOS Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected in the port.
11.10 CMR100M
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The CMR100M is a double-slot combiner card that interfaces to any combination of ten of the following
client signals through SFP+, and maps them into a 100 Gbps colored line signal for WDM network
transport, according to the G.709 standard: 10GbE/STM64/40GbE.
The CMR100M is optimized for metro applications (up to 1200 km without regeneration). The client side
utilizes SFP+ transceivers for 10G interfaces.
The CMR100M works with D-CFP coherent line transceivers that enable transmission of 100Gbps DP-
QPSK modulation, with Flex-Grid capabilities. This transceiver includes a coherent receiver, DSP
processing, and soft decision forward error correction, for superior noise tolerance, as well as an
exceptional ability to mitigate CD and PMD impairments.
The CMR100M line can be deployed with non-colored CFP (instead the coherent CFP) for simple point
to point over dark fiber or any other application. The card supports SR10 or LR4 100G line
transmission. The CMR100M is configured with a 100G CFP on the line side. The target application
determines the type of transceiver chosen. For long haul (LH) applications, an MR1 transceiver is used.
The CMR100M offers the following main features:
10 x SFP+ based client interface ports supporting:
STM64/OC192
10 GbE LAN
10 GbE WAN
OTU2
OTU2e
FC1200
FC800
Up to 2 x 40 GbE based QSFP+ client ports at the expense of 4 x 10 G SFP+ ports per each, with
the following options:
2 x 40 GbE (QSFP+) + 2 x 10 GbE/STM64/OC192/FC800/FC1200/OTU2/OTU2e (SFP+)
1 x 40 GbE (QSFP+) + 6 x 10 GbE/STM64/OC192/FC800/FC1200/OTU2/OTU2e (SFP+)
Each client signal can be configured independently of the other clients
OTU4 line port using a pluggable CFP transceiver (Coherent, SR10 or LR4)
Fully tunable line side DWDM pluggable supporting:
Up to 88 channels, and available in Dual Polarization Differential QPSK (DP-DQPSK)
modulation format
Optimized for metro reach transmission over older fiber infrastructures with high PMD
Complies with ITU-T standards for 50 GHz and 100 GHz multichannel spacing (DWDM)
Card views
General view
Front panel
Usage guidelines
The CMR100M can be assigned to slots 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, ,14, 16, 18, 20, 22 of OPT9624 or slots 0,
2, 4, 6 of OPT9608 platforms.
The 10 Gb client ports are numbered under the line C1-C10 with numbers from (1) to (10) above each
SFP+ housing. The 40 GbE ports are marked C11 and C12 above the QSFP+ housings. When an 40
GbE port is configured, the corresponding four 10 Gb ports are disabled. For example, if port C11 is
provisioned, ports C1 to C4 are disabled.
LED indicators
11.11 TR100/TR100L
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The TR100/TR100L double-slot transponder maps a 100 GbE client signal into a 100 Gbps colored line
signal for WDM network transport, according to the G.709 standard. The TR100/TR100L uses DP-
QPSK modulation, a coherent receiver, DSP processing, and soft decision forward error correction, for
superior noise tolerance, and an exceptional ability to mitigate CD and PMD impairments.
The TR100 is optimized for Ultra Long Haul networking applications, and the TR100L supports regional
applications. While the TR100L does not support single fiber bi-directional WDM operation, in terms of
all other capabilities, the cards are identical and they are interoperable with each other.
The TR100/TR100L can be used in regenerator applications when installed adjacent to another
TR100/TR100L card, or in add/drop mode with an IOP protection option. For regenerator applications
the TR100/TR100L is supported only in OPT9624 and only in slots 0, 2, 4, 6, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22.
Slots 8 and 10 are not supported for regenerator applications.
The TR100/TR100L supports the following main features:
Maps 100 GbE client signals according to G.709 clause 17.7.5 into ODU4
Uses a coherent receiver based DP-QPSK modulation
Mapping uses timing transparent General Mapping Procedure (GMP)
Supports transponder and regenerator applications
Line interface OIF1.1-based transceiver:
Fully C band tunable 50 GHz channel spacing with 88 channels
OTU4v compliant
SD-FEC (Soft Decision FEC)
Capable to retrofit into existing DWDM infrastructure:
Supports 50 GHz channel spacing
Supports up to 24 cascaded ROADMs @ 100 GHz spacing
Supports up to 18 cascaded ROADMs @ 50 GHz spacing
Transmission over mixed fiber types
Same CD/PMD tolerance as current 10G transponders
Transmission with mixed traffic (10G/40G)
Reach of up to 2500 km for greenfield installations without in-line DCMs
Client interface:
Fixed CFP pluggable transceiver
Transponder service supports 100GBASE-LR4/SR10 interfaces
GCC features:
GCC interoperability with the following cards:
HIO100_2
FIO100/FIO100M
CMR100 (100G REG)
TM400 (100G REG)
GCC supported in standard (full rate) mode by default, as well as Apollo proprietary (¼ rate
GCC) reduced mode, user selectable.
One GCC channel supported for OTU4 port, in reduced mode, configurable to either GCC0,
GCC1, or GCC2, user selectable.
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
LED indicators
Regenerator applications
In a regenerator application, the transponder cleans up and amplifies optical signals transmitted
through the optical line (3R regeneration). The regenerator is used when the required distance is longer
than the transponder maximum reach. Two TR100/TR100L cards residing in adjacent slots on the
Apollo platform are used to implement the regenerator configuration. The following figure shows the
connections of the TR100/TR100L cards in this application. The OIF1.1 transceivers connect to the
lines at both ends. The connection between both cards is made through the platform's backplane. The
client is not connected to the CFP transceivers in this application.
Protection options
The TR100/TR100L supports client protection using a splitter/coupler. The active client is selected
using the IOP lines as in other Apollo service cards. Client protection is shown in the following figure.
11.12 TM100
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The TM100 is a single-slot 100G coherent transponder and muxponder card optimized for metro
applications (up to 1200 km without regeneration). When assigned as a transponder (TR100M) the
TM100 maps a 100 GbE client signal into a 100 Gbps colored line signal for WDM network transport,
according to the G.709 standard. In addition it can be configured as a muxponder in two modes: to
multiplex 10 x 10 GbE clients (MXP100E10) or to multiplex 2 x 40 GbE clients (MXP100E40).
The TM100 supports the new generation of compact pluggables (CFP at the line and CFP2 at the
client). Changes in the card's operation mode is implemented by software configuration to assign it to
one of the three modes (TR100M, MXP100E10 and MXP100E40).
The TM100 supports the following main features:
Transponder applications (assigned as TR100M):
Maps 100 GbE client signals according to G.709 clause 17.7.5 into ODU4
Uses a CFP coherent receiver based DP-DQPSK modulation
Mapping uses timing transparent General Mapping Procedure (GMP)
Line interface CFP-based pluggable transceivers:
Fully C band tunable 50 GHz channel spacing with 88 channels
OTU4v compliant
Very low latency SD-FEC (Soft Decision FEC - provides NCG of 11.1 dB)
Client interface:
Fixed CFP2 pluggable transceiver
Transponder service supports LR4/SR10 interfaces
LR4 long-reach up to 10 km
SR10 short-reach up to 300 m
Supports client protection in less than 50 msec, using splitters/couplers
When there is a failure at the client signal or at the line signal it is replaced by an LF alarm
signal
Hot insertion or removal of transceivers is supported without causing traffic interruption or
errors
OTU4 port supports one embedded channel for embedded management, user selectable
from GCC0, GCC1, or GCC2
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
LED indicators
11.13 TM100_2EN
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The TM100_2EN is a double-slot 2 x 100G multi-service, minimal size transponder/muxponder card.
The card is enhanced with optional encryption capabilities (license-based) and software add-ons,
tailored to encrypted/unencrypted applications. By default, TM100_2EN is supplied without the
encryption option.
Card applications are typically in small regional or metro access networks requiring flexible grooming of
mixed rate services up to OTU4. A very useful application would be adding encryption capabilities for
users connecting to third party networks that do not support encryption.
The TM100_2EN is very similar to the TM200EN in all client port aspects. The main difference is in the
line ports; TM200EN has a single CFP2-based line port, while the TM100_2EN has two QSFP28-based
line ports that can be configured to OTU4. The TM100_2EN works with QSFP28 line transceivers,
supporting non-colored LR4, SR4, and ER4 applications.
TM100_2EN features
Flexible configuration modes as a muxponder for N x 10G/16G/32G to dual OTU4
Each service is configurable to operate with or without encryption. Encryption is based on the
AES256 and GCM standards. Optional encryption capabilities are license-based.
GCC features:
GCC supported in standard (full rate) mode.
Up to 2 GCC channels for OTU2/OTU2e, and 2 GCC channels for OTU4 supported.
One GCC supported per port, configurable to either GCC0, GCC1, or GCC2, user selectable.
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
The TM100_2EN line ports are numbered 0 and 21.
The client ports are numbered from 1 to 20, with three types of ports:
2 QSFP+/QSFP28-based ports, Ports 1-4 and 5-8
4 SFP+/SFP28-based ports, Ports 9-12
8 SFP+ based ports, Ports 13-20
The marking above each port identifies the Transmit (Tx) and Receive signals (Rx). The port LED
indicators are under each port.
The TM100_2EN ports are organized into two groups, Group 1 and Group 2. Port types and rates and
group association are listed in the following table. The information is also marked on the card's front
panel.
0 QSFP28 OTU4 1
21 QSFP28 OTU4 2
LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed
configurations). Off when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when
there is no fault in the TM100_2EN.
Line (QSFP28) port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when
a BIT fault is detected in the CFP pluggable transceiver, or the
supply voltage or temperature is OOR.
Client port (QSFP+/QSFP28/SFP+/SFP28 and SFP+) LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when
a BIT fault is detected in the SFP+/QSFP+ pluggable
transceiver, or the supply voltage or temperature is OOR.
11.14 TM100_2ENB
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The TM100_2ENB is a double-slot long 2 x 100G multi-service, minimal-size transponder/muxponder
card for DWDM networks. The card provides a high level of encryption that complies with FIPS 140-2
Level 2 encryption standards, the same encryption capabilities and security features as the TM200ENB;
described in FIPS 140-2 Level 2 security implementation. The traffic of each client port can be
configured, by the user, to be encrypted or not.
The TM100_2ENB is very similar to the TM200ENB in all client port aspects. The main difference is in
the line ports; TM200ENB has a single CFP2-based line port, while the TM100_2ENB has two
QSFP28-based line ports that can be configured to OTU4. The TM100_2ENB works with QSFP28 line
transceivers, supporting non-colored LR4, SR4, and ER4 applications.
TM100_2ENB features
Flexible configuration modes:
Muxponder N x 10G/16G/32G to dual 100G
Muxponder N x 10G/16G/32G
Dual 100G transponders
Each service is configurable to operate with or without encryption, using AES256, FIPS 140-2
Level 2, and GCM standards. Optional encryption capabilities are license-based.
GCC support for in-band management.
Communication channels:
Embedded management support by GCC0 on line ports (one channel per port).
Five embedded user-selectable communication channels (GCC0/GCC1/GCC2) per client
port.
Various protection schemes for high redundancy including:
DWDM network protection based on OLP_S2 card (< 50 mSec switchover for all line types).
DWDM network protection based on OMSP card (< 50 mSec switchover for all line types).
100G line protection based on OLP_S2 card (< 50 mSec switchover for all line types).
Port protection (< 50 mSec switchover for all line types) for all client, excluding SR4
transceiver for QSFP28/QSFP+ clients.
Each service could be protected/unprotected regardless of other services. Protection is
selectable per port.
Card views
Front panel
Ports
The TM100_2ENB line ports are numbered 0 and 21.
The client ports are numbered from 1 to 20, with three types of ports:
2 QSFP+/QSFP28-based ports, Ports 1-4 and 5-8
4 SFP+/SFP28-based ports, Ports 9-12
8 SFP+ based ports, Ports 13-20
The marking above each port identifies the Transmit (Tx) and Receive signals (Rx). The port LED
indicators are under each port.
The TM100_2ENB ports are organized into two groups, Group 1 and Group 2. Port types and rates
and group association are listed in the following table. The information is also marked on the card's
front panel.
0 QSFP28 OTU4 1
21 QSFP28 OTU4 2
LED indicators
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed
configurations). Off when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there
is no fault in the TM100_2ENB.
SECURITY Green/Red (bi- Described in the table below (as it has multiple states).
color) LED
Line (QSFP28) port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when a
BIT fault is detected in the CFP pluggable transceiver, or the
supply voltage or temperature is OOR.
Client port (QSFP+/QSFP28/SFP+/SFP28 and SFP+) LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when a
BIT fault is detected in the SFP+/QSFP+ pluggable transceiver, or
the supply voltage or temperature is OOR.
11.15 TM200EN
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The TM200EN is a double-slot 200G multi-service, low cost, minimal size transponder/muxponder card
for DWDM networks. The card is enhanced with optional encryption capabilities (license-based) and
software add-ons, tailored to encrypted/unencrypted applications. By default, TM200EN is supplied
without the encryption option.
Card applications are typically in data centers and SAN interconnectivity, as well as expansion of
existing networks with 200G encrypted wavelengths, grooming any mixture of services into OTU4 or
OTUC2.
The TM200EN works with D-CFP2 coherent line transceivers, supporting configurable DP-QPSK, 8-
QAM, or 16-QAM modulation, with Flex-Grid capabilities. This transceiver includes a coherent receiver,
DSP processing, and soft decision forward error correction, for superior noise tolerance, as well as an
exceptional ability to mitigate CD and PMD impairments.
TM200EN can be configured to operate in two modes (expected types):
TM200EN - for muxponder applications of OTU or OTUC2, user selectable:
10GE/40GE/100GE
FC8/16/32
STM-64/OC-192
OTU2/2e
TR10_12EN - for six 10G encrypted transponder applications
TM200EN features
Flexible configuration modes:
Muxponder N x 10G/16G/32G to single 100G or 200G
Muxponder N x 10G/16G/32G/100G to 200G
Muxponder 2 x 100G to 200G
Single 100G transponder
6 x 10G transponders
Up to 4 x 10G Y-protected (1 x client to 2 x lines)
Each service is configurable to operate with or without encryption. Encryption is based on the
AES256 and GCM standards. Optional encryption capabilities are license-based.
GCC features:
GCC interoperability with the following cards:
HIO100_2
HIO500
MIO200
TR200_2
TM400 (100G REG)
GCC supported in standard (full rate) mode.
Up to 3 GCC channels for OTU2/OTU2e, and 1 GCC channel for OTUC2/OTU4, supported.
One GCC supported per port, configurable to either GCC0, GCC1, or GCC2, user selectable.
Various protection schemes for high redundancy including:
WSON restoration using coherent OTU4\OTUC2 wavelengths (< 5 sec switchover).
DWDM network protection based on OLP_S2 or OMSP cards (< 50 mSec switchover for all
line types).
100G/200G line protection based on OLP_S2 card (< 50 mSec switchover for all line types).
Port protection (< 50 mSec switchover for all line types) for all client, excluding SR4
transceiver for QSFP28/QSFP+ clients.
Y-protection (<50 mSec switchover) for TR10_12EN mode, up to four protection groups.
Each service could be protected/unprotected regardless of other services. Protection is
selectable per port.
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
The TM200EN line port is numbered 0.
The client ports are numbered from 1 to 20, with three types of ports:
2 QSFP+/QSFP28-based ports, Ports 1-4 and 5-8
4 SFP+/SFP28-based ports, Ports 9-12
8 SFP+ based ports, Ports 13-20
The marking above each port identifies the Transmit (Tx) and Receive signals (Rx). The port LED
indicators are under each port.
The TM200EN ports are organized into two groups, Group 1 and Group 2. Port types and rates and
group association are listed in the following table. The information is also marked on the card's front
panel.
LED indicators
Assignment rules
The following rules apply in TR10_12EN operation mode:
Ports 9 to 12 are always client ports, so the label CLIENT is marked above the port numbers.
Ports 13 and 14 can be client or line ports, so they have no label except the number of the port.
Ports 15 to 20 are always line ports, so the label LINE is marked above the port numbers.
The assignable Ports (9 to 20) can be configured to the following rates:
ETY10G
ETY10GOC
STM-64
OC-192
FC800
FC1200
OTU2
OTU2e
NOTE: Although ports have dedicated roles, the user can XC any two ports described
here.
TR10_12EN features
TR10_12EN provides the basic features of the TR10_12/TR10_12R with the additional capability of
encryption.
In addition the card provides the following functionality:
Six 10G transponders
Protection:
SNCP
Up to 4 groups of Y Protection
WSON restoration
GCC features:
GCC supported in standard (full rate) mode.
Up to 4 GCC channels for OTU2/OTU2e supported.
One GCC supported per port, configurable to either GCC0, GCC1, or GCC2, user selectable.
11.16 TM200ENB
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The TM200ENB is a double-slot long card providing 200G multi-service, minimal size encrypted
solution for DWDM networks. The card provides a high level of encryption that complies with FIPS 140-
2 Level 2 encryption standards, described in FIPS 140-2 Level 2 security implementation. The traffic of
each client port can be configured, by the user, to be encrypted or not.
Card applications are typically in data centers and SAN interconnectivity, as well as expansion of
existing networks with 200G encrypted wavelengths, grooming any mixture of services into OTU4 or
OTUC2.
The TM200ENB works with D-CFP2 coherent line transceivers, supporting configurable DP-QPSK, 8-
QAM, or 16-QAM modulation, with Flex-Grid capabilities. This transceiver includes a coherent receiver,
DSP processing, and soft decision forward error correction, for superior noise tolerance, as well as an
exceptional ability to mitigate CD and PMD impairments.
TM200ENB features
Flexible configuration modes:
Muxponder N x 10G/16G/32G to single 100G or 200G
Muxponder N x 10G/16G/32G/100G to 200G
Muxponder 2 x 100G to 200G
Single 100G transponder
6 x 10G transponders
Up to 4 10G Y-protected (1 x client to 2 x lines)
Each service is configurable to operate with or without encryption, using AES256, FIPS 140-2
Level 2, and GCM standards. Optional encryption capabilities are license-based.
GCC support for in-band management.
Communication channels:
Embedded management support by GCC0 on line ports (one channel per port).
Five embedded user-selectable communication channels (GCC0/GCC1/GCC2) per client
port.
Various protection schemes for high redundancy including:
WSON restoration using coherent OTU4\OTUC2 wavelengths (< 5 sec switchover).
DWDM network protection based on OLP_S2 card (< 50 mSec switchover for all line types).
DWDM network protection based on OMSP card (< 50 mSec switchover for all line types).
100G/200G line protection based on OLP_S2 card (< 50 mSec switchover for all line types).
Port protection (< 50 mSec switchover for all line types) for all client, excluding SR4
transceiver for QSFP28/QSFP+ clients.
Y-protection (<50 mSec switchover) for TR10_12EN mode, up to four protection groups.
Each service could be protected/unprotected regardless of other services. Protection is
selectable per port.
Encryption keys are rotated by the RCP per NE.
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
The TM200ENB line port is numbered 0.
The client ports are numbered from 1 to 20, with three types of ports:
2 QSFP+/QSFP28-based ports, Ports 1-4 and 5-8
4 SFP+/SFP28-based ports, Ports 9-12
8 SFP+ based ports, Ports 13-20
The marking above each port identifies the Transmit (Tx) and Receive signals (Rx). The port LED
indicators are under each port.
The TM200ENB ports are organized into two groups, Group 1 and Group 2. Port types and rates and
group association are listed in the following table. The information is also marked on the card's front
panel.
LED indicators
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed
configurations). Off when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when
there is no fault in the card.
SECURITY Green/Red (bi-color) Described in the table below (as it has multiple states).
LED
Line (CFP2) port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when a
BIT fault is detected in the CFP pluggable transceiver, or the
supply voltage or temperature is OOR.
Client port (QSFP+/QSFP28/SFP+/SFP28 and SFP+) LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when a
BIT fault is detected in the SFP+/QSFP+ pluggable transceiver,
or the supply voltage or temperature is OOR.
Three different tamper covers protect components relevant to FIPS functionality. These areas are
defined as "cryptographic boundary" areas, such that all the components within that boundary are
covered by a tamper cover. The following figure shows the block diagram of the TM200ENB, with the
cryptographic areas outlined in blue. Components within the blue-outline boundary are shielded by a
FIPS-compliant tamper cover.
The cover is installed on the PCB in a secure, FIPS-compliant manner. There are three different tamper
covers:
HCPM tamper cover: Also referred to as the "main" tamper cover. It covers most of the
cryptographically sensitive components on the module, including a CPLD used for control, the
main CPU (called HCPM), the system RAM, etc.
JTAG tamper cover: Covers the JTAG port. The JTAG port is used only at the manufacturer site,
during a manufacturing or rework procedure, to load the CPLD image or a secure Boot ROM
software image into the components located underneath the HCPM cover. The JTAG port is
enclosed in a separate FIPS-compliant cover. It allows the manufacturer to utilize the JTAG port
without touching the main HCPM cover.
DEBUG tamper cover: Secured using a FIPS-approved tamper evident sticker. The debug port
secured by this cover can be accessed from the front panel as long as the tamper sticker is not
applied.
The following figure shows a general view of the TM200ENB and the location of the tamper covers.
FIPS card installation requires a few steps at the customer site, to be performed only by the responsible
cryptographic officer (CO). This includes the physical module installation, application of tamper
detecting labels on certain surfaces, loading the critical security parameters (CSPs), and periodic
inspection and maintenance tasks.
To guarantee FIPS security, the card must be installed on-site according to the following guidelines.
Details for specific procedure steps are provided in this document.
The card is shipped from the manufacturer loaded with a trusted boot-ROM image and with the
HCPM and JTAG tamper covers sealed.
The designated CO at the customer site is responsible for the entire installation process.
In addition to the sealed tamper covers physically mounted on the card, tamper evident stickers
are provided. Each sticker has a unique serial number.
Additional dummy-cards can be provided to populate empty slots adjacent to the card. Real (non-
encryption) or dummy cards that surround the encryption card installed in the platform further
block access to the card's PCB surface. It is therefore recommended that customers either install
the encryption card in an end slot (first or last) or install it such that there are other cards (dummy
or real) surrounding the encryption card.
Since sensitive card circuitry is covered by tamper shield installed on the card itself, from a FIPS
perspective the card is safe even without surrounding cards. Nevertheless, dummy card
installation is recommended.
Stickers and dummy-cards can be ordered as separate parts for the installation process or for
later use.
The CO is responsible for keeping labels in safe custody, recording their serial numbers, and
keeping track of inventory.
Upon removing the card from its packaging, the CO must inspect these tamper covers for any
gaps or broken labels. If the seals or covers look suspicious, the CO should not proceed with the
installation and should contact the manufacturer.
When the encryption card is installed and powered up, the CO connects a CLI terminal with a
serial cable to the debug port. A message is displayed on the screen, indicating that the CPLD
password is invalid and must be configured.
The CO must then configure a password. The password must be stored in a safe location. There
is no other factory or back-door password. If the CPLD password is lost, the card must be shipped
back to the manufacturer for restoration.
After the CPLD password is configured, the CPLD logic displays more options on-screen, to either
run CPLD diagnostics or proceed directly with the system boot.
The CO is the only person authorized to load the {private, public} key-pair owned by the card. This
key pair is essentially the identity of the card and is expected to be globally unique.
After the card is fully configured, loaded with keys, and operates as expected, the CO must apply
tamper stickers to the relevant components. A tamper sticker should also be applied across the
debug port, unless the port must be left accessible for some other purpose. These are not FIPS
requirements, but a recommended security procedure to help expose unauthorized activities
around the card.
FIPS installation ends with CSPs loaded and front panel secured.
If there is subsequently any indication that these stickers were tampered with (without being
accounted for by the CO), this is considered a security breach. The CO should periodically inspect
the front panel for any tamper evidence.
HCPM or JTAG tamper events are serious security issues. In such cases the card must be sent
back to the manufacturer.
If stickers are broken but the tamper covers are intact, the CO should consider this as a security
event and proceed with full FIPS re-installation using the CPLD password. In this case it's not
required to send the card back to the manufacturer.
11.18 TR200_2
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The TR200_2 is a low-cost, single-slot high-density double independent transponder/muxponder that
supports transport of one ETY100G/OTU4 service over OTU4 or two ETY100G/OTU4 services over
OTUC2. It occupies a single slot in OPT96xx platforms. The card maps the ETY100G/OTU4 client
signals to OTU4 or OTUC2.
The TR200_2 works with D-CFP2 coherent line transceivers, supporting configurable DP-QPSK, 8-
QAM, or 16-QAM modulation, with Flex-Grid capabilities. This transceiver includes a coherent receiver,
DSP processing, and soft decision forward error correction, for superior noise tolerance, as well as an
exceptional ability to mitigate CD and PMD impairments.
Card views
General view
Front panel
LEDs
LED indicators
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no fault
in the TR200_2.
OTU4 or OTUC2 regenerator - in this application the TR200_2 is used to regenerate OTU4 or
OTUC2 signals. In the OTU4 regenerator application the OTU4 is fed to one Line port. Two Client
ports equipped with OTU4/SRDR transceivers and connected between themselves and provide
the OTU4 regeneration. The regenerated OTU4 signal is fed from the second Line port.
Similarly, for OTUC2 regenerator application the OTUC2 is fed to one Line port. Two pairs of
Client ports equipped with OTU4/SRDR transceivers are connected between themselves, such
that each pair regenerate an OTU4 signal, totaling an OTUC2 signal. The resulting regenerated
OTUC2 signal is output via the second Line port.
The following figures shows block diagrams of the OTU4 and OTUC2 signals regeneration with
the TR200_2.
DP-QAM16 SD-FEC15 --
The following table describes the line port encoding and FEC type supported configurations.
OTU4 client port types support FEC only and FEC Ignore is not supported. ETY100G client port types
support RS FEC, depending on the transceiver type.
11.19 TM400
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The TM400 is a double-slot Flex-grid and Flex-rate transponder/muxponder card designed for ultra-long
haul, metro-long haul, and metro-regional network configurations. It has four client ports and two line
ports supporting line rates of 2 x 200 Gbps, or 2 x 100 Gbps. The card occupies a double (long) slot in
the Apollo supported platforms. The card can be configured to operate in one of two modes:
transponder or muxponder.
TM400 provides a multi-service, cost-effective solution with 100G/200G wavelengths. The card's OTN
framer terminates with two internal transceivers, each directly connected to a line.
Features
Transponder/muxponder with two independent line ports, supporting OTU4 (100 G) or OTUC2
(200 G).
High order phase modulation selected for best OSNR and signal reach:
100 G line - DP-QPSK.
200 G line - DP-16QAM.
Four client ports supporting any mix of the following services:
100 GbE
OTU4
10 x 10 GbE (via fanout cable or patch panel)
Pluggable CFP2 client interface:
LR4 long-reach up to 10 km (100GE/OTU4)
SR10 short-reach up to 300 m (OTU4/100GE/10x10GE)
LR10 up to 10 Km (10x10GE)
Supports two SD-FEC modes:
SD-FEC25; provides maximum performance but not compatible with other Apollo cards like:
TM100, CMR100,etc.
SD-FEC (regular also marked SD-FEC15) for compatibility operation with other Apollo cards.
GCC features:
GCC interoperability with the following cards:
HIO100_2 (100G REG)
HIO500 (100G REG)
MIO200 (100G REG)
FIO100/FIO100M (100G REG)
CMR100M/CMR100 (100G REG)
TM100/TR100 (100G REG)
TM200EN (100G REG)
TR200_2 (100G REG)
GCC supported in standard (full rate) mode.
Up to 4 GCC channels for OTU4 client ports supported.
Up to 2 GCC channels for OTUC2/OTU4 line ports supported.
One GCC supported per port, configurable to either GCC0, GCC1, or GCC2, user selectable.
Card views
General view: TM400
Front panel
Usage guidelines
The four client interfaces are organized in groups of ten ports each:
Group 1: ports 2 to 11,
Group 2: ports 12 to 21,
Group 3: ports 22 to 31 and
Group 4: 32 to 41.
In each group only one port type of similar rate can be accepted; 100G (OTU4 or 100GE), or N x 10G
(N<=10) up to the aggregate bandwidth of 100G (per client).
For example:
If port 2 is configured to OTU4, then any configuration to ports 3 to 11 will be rejected.
If port 2 is configured to 10GE, any attempt to configure one of the other ports to 100G will be
rejected.
If port 2 is configured to ETY40G, port 3 can be configured only to ETY40G and any configuration
to ports 4 to 11 will be rejected.
LEDs
LED indicators
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed
configurations). Off when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there
is no fault in the TM400.
Client Port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when a
BIT fault is detected in the CFP2 pluggable transceiver, or the
supply voltage or temperature is OOR.
Line Port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
LOS Red LED
Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when
a BIT fault is detected in the TM400 transceiver, or the supply
voltage or temperature is OOR.
NOTES:
Operation of the second line port is subject to software license.
When line ports are configured for 100G and/or 200G, each port in the pair acts
independently and can be configured for a different path.
Block diagram
The default mode of the TM400_REG100 is SD-FEC. With SD-FEC, the card operates with
compatibility to legacy SD-FEC (SD-FEC15) and differential QPSK encoding of other devices for
Regional/Long-Haul applications. SD-FEC25 provides a very high error correction, maximizing the
performance of the TM400 for Ultra Long-Haul applications. This mode increases the Bit Rate,
consuming about 25 % more of Over Head (bandwidth) of the OTU4 frame. The SD-FEC25 is not
compatible with legacy SD-FEC, and can be used only if the peer device is configured to the same
mode. In addition, when SD-FEC25 is selected Non Differential QPSK encoding is used.
In the TM400_REG100, each line can be configured to a different SD-FEC mode, according to the
mode of the peer device connected to the line as follows:
SD-FEC15 <> SD-FEC15
SD-FEC25 <> SD-FEC25
SD-FEC15 <> SD-FEC25
SD-FEC25 <> SD-FEC15
11.20 TM400_2
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The TM400_2 is a new single-slot service card for the Apollo family, a dual transponder-muxponder that
combines software-programmable modulation with an internal switch to provide compact, low power,
and versatile 400G transport of 100GbE and 400GbE clients for metro, regional, and long haul
applications. The card includes a high baud rate standard 400G DCO CFP2 ZR transceiver for line,
configurable to full standard OTUC2 or OTUC4.
The TM400_2 400G offers maximum density (up to 12.8Tbps (client and line) in 5RU) at lowest cost.
These low power cards utilize ~0.15W per Gbps, and ~125W for a fully populated card. These cards
enable a pay-as-you-grow approach by supporting both 100GE and 400GE interfaces in the same card.
The TM400_2 provides the following main features:
Up to 1.6T total capacity
D-CFP2 line interfaces supporting 2 x 400G uplinks, with the following modes:
Metro/DCI and other short distance applications: 400G (OTUC4)
Regional/long haul: 200G (OTUC2)
Two QSFP28/56/DD client interfaces with the following modes:
Dual 100GE muxponder, mapping 2 x 100GE/OTU4 signals to OTUC2.
Dual 100GE muxponder, mapping 4 x 100GE/OTU4 signals to OTUC4.
Dual 400GE metro transponder, mapping 2 x 400GE signals to 2 x OTUC4.
Single 400GE long-haul transponder, mapping 400GE signals to 2 x OTUC2.
Regenerator mode with fixed OTUC2.
Card views
General view
Front panel
LEDs
LED indicators
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no fault
in the TR200_2.
Client Ports (QSFP28/56/DD) LEDs
(2-5), (6-9) Bi-color LED
(Green or
Red):
No fault Lights Green when the Laser is transmitting. Off when the port's transmitter
is off.
LOS Blinks Green/Red when a LOS condition is detected and the Laser is on.
Blinks Red when a LOS condition is detected and the Laser is off.
Fault Lights steadily Red when a BIT fault is detected Laser is on or off.
Line Ports (CFP2) LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's transmitter is
off.
LOS Red LED Lights steadily when a BIT fault is detected in the OIF1.1 transceiver or the
supply voltage or temperature is OOR.
These high density cards can be combined to maximize transport capacity in the OPT96xx platforms.
For example:
OPT9603: Up to 3 dual muxponder cards in the platform,
supporting 3 x 2 x 400G --> 6 x 400G muxponders/transponders per platform
OPT9608: Up to 8 dual muxponder cards in the platform,
supporting 8 x 2 x 400G --> 16 x 400G muxponders/transponders per platform
OPT9624: Up to 24 dual muxponder cards in the platform,
supporting 24 x 2 x 400G --> 48 x 400G muxponders/transponders per platform
The TM400_2 can be configured into three different modes:
TM400_2: Configured in regular mode where you can use all clients and all ports.
TM400_MC: Fixed port configuration with 2 x lines and 1(OTUC2) x client (ETY400G).
TM400_REG: 2 x line configuration with OTUC2.
In this example, the client port ETY100G (port 2) is split into 2 x OTUC2 line ports (ports 0 and1). The
port numbers and cross-connections are fixed, but you can change the wavelengths and line codes.
When used as a TM400_REG, you cannot configure any client port, which are completely disabled.
You can only configure the 2 x line ports, as fixed OTUC2 ports. You can change the wavelength and
line codes of these ports.
The TM400_2 can be used as a transponder or a muxponder. As a transponder, you configure the
ETY400G as a client directly connected into OTUC4 to transmit to the other side.
In muxponder mode, you can configure the ETY100G port to multiplex the lines to OTUC2/OTUC4,
meaning you will have 2 x ODU4s / 4 x ODU4s.
DP-16QAM-PS HG-SD-FEC
QSFP28 No 1 ODU4
Port No. Port type Transceiver form Fan out? Number of ports per Sub-interface Mapping
factor transceiver
3 ETY100G QSFP56-DD Yes 4 ODU4 GMP
QSFP28-DD Yes 2 ODU4 GMP
QSFP28 No 1 ODU4
11.21 TM1200
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608 (requires FCM revision F.00 or higher)
OPT9603
Description
The TM1200 is a flexible grid, flexible rate, 1.2T transponder/muxponder designed to maximize traffic
carrying capacity for any application or line condition. It maps up to 12 x 100GbE or OTU4 clients, on to
two line interfaces that can be configured from 100 Gbps to 600 Gbps in 50 Gbps increments.
The TM1200 can be configured for use for all applications and in all bit rates and baud rates, including:
600G DCI
400G metro
200G long haul
100G ultra long haul
The TM1200 provides software-controllable dials for the modulation scheme (BPSK up to 64QAM),
baud rate (34G to 72G), and transmit power. The TM1200 combines this with full spectral flexibility to
select the best channel width to find the “sweet spot” that maximizes the line rate – and thus the
services capacity – for any set of channel conditions. The TM1200 features SD-FEC of 15% and 27%,
with NCG of 12.7dB.
Features
OTU-A adaptive line rates, mapping up to 12 x 100GbE or OTU4 clients, on to two line interfaces
that can be configured on-the-fly from 100 Gbps to 600 Gbps in 50 Gbps increments.
Transponder/muxponder with 2 independent line ports, supporting up to 600Gbps per line.
Coupling mode offers the option to split an odd number of clients into two separate lines. For
example, 5x100GbE clients can be split over 2x250Gbps line ports.
Continuously configurable modulation selected for best OSNR and signal reach:
1-6 bits/symbol modulation options
100-600Gbps line rate
Expert mode - enables fine tuning of the b/sym configuration for maximal link performance
Up to 12 client ports supporting the following services:
100 GbE
OTU4
Mixtures of OTU4 and 100GE are supported. The 12 ports are organized into 3 groups of 4 ports
each. Each group can be configured separately to either 100G or OTU4. The 4 ports within each
group must have the same configuration, either 100G or OTU4. The dual rate CFP transceivers
can be configured for either OTU4 or 100GE interfaces.
Pluggable QSFP28 client interfaces, for example:
AOC30 100GbE active optical cable, up to 30m
SR4DR short-reach, up to 100m
LR4DR long-reach, up to 10km
ER4DR extended reach, up to 40km
All line to client port cross connects supported; any combination of client and line ports can be
configured.
Supports two SD-FEC modes in the line:
SD-FEC27 for maximum performance
SD-FEC15 for short range applications with minimal spectral bandwidth
GCC features:
GCC supported in standard (full rate) mode by default, as well as Apollo proprietary (¼ rate
GCC) reduced mode, user selectable.
Supports up to 2 channels for OTUA in reduced mode.
One GCC supported per port, configurable to either GCC0, GCC1, or GCC2, user selectable.
Built-in OSNR monitoring and E2E latency measurement
Card views
General view
Front panel
Usage guidelines
The TM1200 provides 2 line ports (Port 0 and 1) and 12 client ports (Port 2 to 13).
The line rates supported for OTUA ports in TM800 are 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350 and 400, 450,
500, 550, 600 Gbps.
LEDs
11.22 TM800
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608 (requires FCM revision F.00 or higher)
OPT9603
Description
The TM800 is a flexible grid, flexible rate, 800G transponder/muxponder designed to maximize traffic
carrying capacity for any application or line condition. It maps up to 8 x 100GbE or OTU4 clients, on to
two line interfaces that can be configured from 100 Gbps to 400 Gbps in 50 Gbps increments.
The TM800 can be configured for use for all applications and in all bit rates and baud rates, including:
400G metro
200G long haul
100G ultra long haul
The TM800 provides software-controllable dials for the modulation scheme (BPSK up to 64QAM), baud
rate (34G to 72G), and transmit power. The TM800 combines this with full spectral flexibility to select a
channel width to always find the “sweet spot” that maximizes the line rate – and thus the services
capacity – for any set of channel conditions. The TM800 features SD-FEC of 15% and 27%, with NCG
of 12.7dB.
Features
OTU-A adaptive line rates, mapping up to 8 x 100GbE or OTU4 clients, on to two line interfaces
that can be configured on-the-fly from 100 Gbps to 400 Gbps in 50 Gbps increments.
Transponder/muxponder with 2 independent line ports, supporting up to 400Gbps per line.
Coupling mode offers the option to split an odd number of clients into two separate lines. For
example, 5x100GbE clients can be split over 2x250Gbps line ports.
Continuously configurable modulation selected for best OSNR and signal reach:
2-4 bits/symbol modulation options
100-400Gbps line rate
Expert mode - enables fine tuning of the b/sym configuration for maximal link performance
Up to 8 client ports supporting the following services:
100 GbE
OTU4
Mixtures of OTU4 and 100GE are supported. The 8 ports are organized into 2 groups of 4 ports
each. Each group can be configured separately to either 100G or OTU4. The 4 ports within each
group must have the same configuration, either 100G or OTU4. The dual rate CFP transceivers
can be configured for either OTU4 or 100GE interfaces.
Pluggable QSFP28 client interfaces, for example:
AOC30 100GbE active optical cable, up to 30m
SR4DR short-reach, up to 100m
LR4DR long-reach, up to 10km
ER4DR extended reach, up to 40km
All line to client port cross connects supported; any combination of client and line ports can be
configured.
All ports must be configured consistently; all 100G or all OTU4.
Supports two SD-FEC modes in the line:
SD-FEC27 for maximum performance
SD-FEC15 for short range applications with minimal spectral bandwidth
GCC features:
GCC supported in standard (full rate) mode by default, as well as Apollo proprietary (¼ rate
GCC) reduced mode, user selectable.
Supports up to 2 channels for OTUA in reduced mode.
One GCC supported per port, configurable to either GCC0, GCC1, or GCC2, user selectable.
Built-in OSNR monitoring and E2E latency measurement
Card views
General view
Front panel
Usage guidelines
The TM800 provides 2 line ports (Port 0 and 1) and 8 client ports (Port 2 to 9.
The line rates supported for OTUA ports in TM800 are 50, 100, 150, 200, 250, 300, 350 and 400 Gbps.
LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed
configurations). Off when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there
is no fault in the TM400.
Client Port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when a
BIT fault is detected in the CFP2 pluggable transceiver, or the
supply voltage or temperature is OOR.
Line Port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
LOS Red LED
Blinks when a LOS condition is detected.
11.23 TM1200E
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608 (requires FCM revision F.00 or higher)
OPT9603
Description
The TM1200E programmable transponder/muxponder can transport up to 3 x 400GE clients. The
modulation scheme is adjusted automatically by the device, based on the line rate and bits/symbol, to
optimize the optical performance for a wide range of distances and fiber conditions. Built-in monitoring
provides continuous OSNR and performance feedback.
The TM1200E can be configured for use for all applications, with the following line rates. The
modulation setting (b/sym) can be configured per rate.
1x400GE (over 2 carriers of 200Gbps line rates) for long haul
2x400GE for metro
3x400GE, mapping to 2x600G for DCI applications
The TM1200E maximizes 400GE transport in networks where a flexible grid is available, as well as in
networks with technological constraints to a 50GHz grid.
Features
OTU-A adaptive line rates, mapping up to 3 x 400GbE clients, on to two line interfaces that can be
configured on-the-fly from 200 Gbps to 600 Gbps in 200 Gbps increments.
Transponder/muxponder with 2 independent line ports, supporting up to 600Gbps per line.
Coupling mode offers the option to split clients into two separate lines. For example, 400GbE
clients can be split over 2x200Gbps line ports.
The TM1200E can be configured to snoop LLDP information on an ETY400G port that is
connected to a client device such as a router. When enabled, the following snooping information is
gathered at the ingress of the ETY400G port:
Chassis ID
Port ID
Management Address
Continuously configurable modulation selected for best OSNR and signal reach:
1-6 bits/symbol modulation options
200, 400, 600Gbps line rates
Expert mode - enables fine tuning of the b/sym configuration for maximal link performance
Pluggable QSFP56-DD client interfaces, for example:
AOC10 400GbE active optical cable, up to 10m
DR4 short-reach, single mode, 1310nm, up to 500m
FR4 long-reach, single mode, up to 2km
Supports two SD-FEC modes:
SD-FEC27 for maximum performance
SD-FEC15 for short range applications with minimal spectral bandwidth
GCC features:
GCC supported in standard (full rate) mode by default, as well as Apollo proprietary (¼ rate
GCC) reduced mode, user selectable.
Supports up to 2 channels for OTUA in reduced mode.
One GCC supported per line port, configurable to either GCC0, GCC1, or GCC2, user
selectable.
Built-in OSNR monitoring and E2E latency measurement
Card views
General view
Front panel
LEDs
11.24 TM800E
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608 (requires FCM revision F.00 or higher)
OPT9603
Description
The TM800E programmable transponder/muxponder can transport two 400GE clients, offering the most
400GE clients per application. The modulation scheme is adjusted automatically by the device, based
on the line rate and bits/symbol, to optimize the optical performance for a wide range of distances and
fiber conditions. Built-in monitoring provides continuous OSNR and performance feedback.
The TM800E can be configured for use for all applications, with the following line rates. The modulation
setting (b/sym) can be configured per rate.
1x400GbE (over 2 carriers of 200Gbps line rates) for long haul
2x400GbE for metro
Regeneration mode: Supports optical-electrical-optical (OEO) regeneration of 100G-400G line
rates for all TM800/E and TM1200/E cards. When configured as TM800E_REG, the card supports
OTU-A regeneration of line rates with 100G-400Gbps via both line ports.
The TM800E maximizes 400GE transport in networks where a flexible grid is available, as well as in
networks with technological constraints to a 50GHz grid.
Features
OTU-A adaptive line rates, mapping up to 2 x 400GbE clients, on to two line interfaces that can be
configured on-the-fly from 100 Gbps to 400 Gbps in 50 Gbps increments.
Transponder/muxponder with 2 independent line ports, supporting up to 400GbE per line.
Coupling mode offers the option to split clients into two separate lines. For example, 400GbE
clients can be split over 2x200Gbps line ports.
The TM800E can be configured to snoop LLDP information on an ETY400G port that is connected
to a client device such as a router. When enabled, the following snooping information is gathered
at the ingress of the ETY400G port:
Chassis ID
Port ID
Management Address
Continuously configurable modulation selected for best OSNR and signal reach:
2-4 bits/symbol modulation options
200, 400Gbps line rates
Expert mode - enables fine tuning of the b/sym configuration for maximal link performance
Pluggable QSFP56-DD client interfaces, for example:
AOC10 400GbE active optical cable, up to 10m
DR4 short-reach, single mode, up to 500m
FR4 long-reach, single mode, up to 2km
Card views
General view
Front panel
LEDs
Marking Item Functions
Card LEDs
IS Green LED Lights when the card is IS (assigned and completed configurations). Off
when the card is not assigned.
SW-U Yellow LED Currently not in use.
FAIL Red LED Lights steadily when a fault is detected in the card. Off when there is no
fault in the TM400.
Client port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
F/L Red LED Blinks when a LOS condition is detected. Lights steadily when a BIT fault
is detected in the CFP2 pluggable transceiver, or the supply voltage or
temperature is OOR.
Line port LEDs
Tx Green LED Lights steadily when the port is transmitting. Off when the port's
transmitter is off.
LOS Red LED
Blinks when a LOS condition is detected.
11.25 FIO10_5/5B
Supported platform
OPT9624
Description
FIO10_5 and FIO10_5B are single-slot fabric interface I/O cards that support up to five 10G interfaces
using fixed or tunable pluggable XFP transceivers. Each port of these cards can be configured to serve
as either client or line interface port. The cards are very similar except the support of different traffic
rates. FIO10_5 client interface ports accept 10G LAN, STM-64/OC-192, FC800, FC1200, OTU2, or
OTU2e signals. Client signals are mapped to ODU2 or ODU2e (G.709) and cross connected through
the central universal fabric to the line side. FIO10_5B client interface ports accept 10G LAN, STM-
64/OC-192, OTU2, or OTU2e signals. Client signals are mapped to ODU2 or ODU2e (G.709) and cross
connected through the central universal fabric to the line side.
Features
50 Gbps total capacity
Five XFP-based client ports
Line interface signals are terminated to tributary ODUk signals and transmitted through the fabric
to the outgoing side
Complies with ITU-T standards for 50 GHz and 100 GHz multichannel spacing (DWDM)
Supports PM and GCC in-band management, with PM for the signals' native layer (SDH/SONET
and Ethernet)
Supports GFEC, EFEC (I.4 and I.7), and ignore-FEC modes for OTU2/2e signals
The FIO10_5 client interfaces are multiservice, software configurable, supporting:
10G LAN
STM-64/OC-192
OTU2
OTU2e
FC800
FC1200
The FIO10_5B client interfaces are multiservice, software configurable, supporting:
10G LAN
STM-64/OC-192
OTU2
OTU2e
In FIO10_5B the ODU2 sub-interface under OTU2 port is with PT=21. In addition, FIO10_5B supports
ODU0 but doesn't support the following:
ODUSlot
ODUFlex
FC1200
FC800
The OPT96xx platforms support a mix FIO10_5 and FIO10_5B, including in the same cage. It is
possible to configure cross-connects between FIO10_5 and FIO10_5B cards (High order ODUs). It is
also possible to reassign FIO10_5 to FIO10_5B keeping the previous configurations.
In addition, FIO10_5B are fully interoperable with FIO10_5 cards. To interoperate with FIO10_5 cards
the user shall edit PT changing it to 20.
Card views
General view
The markings Tx (transmit) and Rx (receive) above each port indicate the port's output and input
connections.
LEDs
11.26 FIOMR_16/16B
Supported platform
OPT9624
When using FM1000 1 Tbps universal fabric
Description
The FIOMR_16 and FIOMR_16B are single-slot fabric interface I/O cards that support up to 16 low-rate
client interfaces using SFP transceivers. The cards are very similar except the support of different traffic
rates. Each FIOMR_16 port can be configured to STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, GbE, FC1/FC2/FC4,
OTU-1, STM-16/OC-48, DVB-ASI, SDI, and HD-SDI signals. Client-side signals are mapped to G.709
ODU-k and cross connected through the central universal fabric to the egress side. Each FIOMR_16B
port can be configured to STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, STM-16/OC-48, GbE, OTU-1,signals. Client-side
signals are mapped to G.709 ODU-k and cross connected through the central universal fabric to the
egress side.
Features
OTU-1 signals are terminated to tributary ODU-k signals and transmitted through the fabric to the
egress side
OTU-1 ports support GFEC mode
Supports PM and GCC in-band management, with PM for the signals' native layer (SDH/SONET
and Ethernet)
Supports subnetwork connection protection with nonintrusive monitoring (SNC-N) for the tributary
signals
The difference between the cards is in the traffic rates they support:
The FIOMR_16 provides 16 SFP-based client ports, software-configurable to support GbE, 1G
FC, 2G FC, 4G FC, STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, STM-16/OC-48, and OTU1 services
The FIOMR_16B provides 16 SFP-based client ports, software-configurable to support GbE,
STM-1/OC-3, STM-4/OC-12, STM-16/OC-48, and OTU1 services
In addition, the FIOMR_16B supports ODU1 and ODU0 cross-connections to any other FIOMR_16B
and FIO10_5B. It doesn't support any other type of cross-connection through the central fabric (like
ODU2). FIOMR_16B can work with FIOMR_16B via FIO10_5B or FIO100 only. FIOMR_16 can work
with FIOMR_16 via FIO10_5 or FIO100 only.
Card views
General view
The port number is indicated under/above each port. The markings T (transmit) and R (receive) near
each port indicate only the port's output and input connections and don't relate to the port LEDs.
LEDs
11.27 FIO100
Supported platform
OPT9624
When using FM1000 1 Tbps universal fabric
Description
The FIO100 card is a double-slot OTU4v uplink for the 1 Tbps universal fabric of the OPT9624 platform.
The 100G OTU-4 is terminated to its tributary signals (ODUk) and cross connected through the fabric to
the egress side. The FIO100 offers the following main features:
Multiplexing of up to 80 Low Order (LO) ODUk channels into OTU4
Low order ODUk including: ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2e, ODUflex, and ODU4
Line side interface OTU4v using an OIF1.1 module, supporting:
PM-QPSK modulation
Bit rate, 120.579 Gbps (OTU4v)
SD-FEC (provides NCG of 11.1 dB)
GCC features:
GCC interoperability with the following cards:
CMR100CMR100M (Add and Drop)
TR100/TM100 (Regenerator)
TM400 (100G REG)
GCC supported in standard (full rate) mode.
One GCC channel supported, configurable to either GCC0, GCC1, or GCC2, user selectable.
Protection capabilities:
Employs 1 + 1 Sub Net Connection Protection (SNCP)
Supports 1+1 Optical Line Protection (OLP)
ODU4 has a default Payload Type of (PT21)
The PT for low order ODUk (that are other than ODU4) is PT21
Card views
General view
Front panel
Usage guidelines
The FIO100 card can be assigned in any even IO slot of the OPT9624 configured as fabric NE.
LEDs
11.28 FIO100M
Supported platform
OPT9624
When using FM1000 1 Tbps universal fabric
Description
The FIO100M card is a double-slot OTU4 uplink for the 1 Tbps universal fabric of the OPT9624
platform. The 100G OTU-4 is terminated to its tributary signals (ODUk) and cross connected through
the fabric to the egress side.
The FIO100M offers the following main features:
Multiplexing of up to 80 Low Order (LO) ODUk channels into OTU4
Low order ODUk including: ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU2e, ODUflex, and ODU4
Line side interface OTU4v using an CFP module, supporting:
PM-QPSK modulation
Bit rate, 120.579 Gbps (OTU4v)
SD-FEC (provides NCG of 11.1 dB)
GCC features:
GCC interoperability with the following cards:
CMR100/CMR100M (Add and Drop)
TR100/TM100 (Regenerator)
TM400 (100G REG)
GCC supported in standard (full rate) mode.
One GCC channel supported, configurable to either GCC0, GCC1, or GCC2, user selectable.
Protection capabilities:
Employs 1 + 1 Sub Net Connection Protection (SNCP)
Supports 1+1 Optical Line Protection (OLP)
ODU4 has a default Payload Type of (PT21)
The PT for low order ODUk (that are other than ODU4) is PT21
Card views
General view
Front panel
Ports
LED indicators
12.1 AoC10_L2
Supported platforms
OPT9624
OPT9608
OPT9603
Description
The AoC10_L2 is an MPLS service card that supports an advanced Ethernet-based metro-core layer,
enabling NG Ethernet applications such as triple play, VPLS business connectivity, 3G Ethernet-based
aggregation, and CoC bandwidth applications. The AoC10_L2 cards provides complete PB (QinQ) and
MPLS switching functionality, offering scalability and smooth interoperability with IP/MPLS core routers.
The AoC10_L2 supports full interoperability with data cards in the NPT, XDM, and BroadGate
platforms, as well as seamless interfacing with external third-party hardware.
Features
16 SFP-based client ports, support electrical/optical 1 x GbE interfaces (the port type depends on
inserted SFP).
Configurable 4 SFP+ -based 10 GbE LAN or OTU2e line ports.
Two additional internal 10 GbE ports for connecting a AoC10_L2 to a mate card via platform
backplane. (Supported only for OPT9624 and OPT9608 platforms).
Supports new tunable SFP+ transceivers on the line ports.
Data throughput of 60 Gbps.
Configurable data switching modes:
Ethernet PB (QinQ) switch, based on 802.1d/q/ad - default.
MPLS-TP Layer 2 switch.
Interoperability with XDM MCS, BG and NPT L2 cards.
General MPLS-TP and Ethernet interoperability with third party datacom equipment.
Card views
General view
Front panel
A number and arrow are marked near each port LED. The number identifies the port number and the
arrow points to the location of the port in the upper or lower row. The 16 x 1 GbE SFP ports are
numbered from 0 to 15. The four 10 GbE SFP+ ports are in the lower row at the left and are numbered
from 16 to 19.
The following table describes the AoC10_L2 front panel component functionality.
LEDs
The Artemis shelves can be installed in different rack types, including ETSI, 19", and 23". They feature
an extended operating temperature range of 5 ºC to +60 ºC that makes them ideal for deployment in
street cabinets for outdoor applications.
A wide range of CWDM and DWDM Mux/DeMux, OADMs, splitters/couplers, DCFs, and filters are
available for use with the Artemis shelves. In addition Apollo passive cards are also supported in the
Artemis.
The passive optical components are available in three different module sizes:
Single slot
Double slot
Quad slot
13.2.1 Artemis-1P
The Artemis-1P is a 1U platform housed in a 239.5 mm (9.43 in.) deep, 443 mm (17.4 in.) wide, and
43.4 mm (1.7 in.) high equipment cage. The Artemis-1P features a highly flexible structure with a
significantly small footprint. All modules can be inserted even when the platform delivers live traffic
without affecting it.
The Artemis-1P platform has a default configuration of two single slots. These slots can be configured
as a double slot, by removing the divider bracket between the single slots.
13.2.2 Artemis-2A
The Artemis-2A is a 2U platform housed in a 239.5 mm (9.43 in.) deep, 443 mm (17.4 in.) wide, and
87.9 mm (3.46 in.) high equipment cage. The Artemis-2A features a highly flexible structure with a
significantly small footprint. All modules can be inserted even when the platform delivers live traffic
without affecting it. The platform can accommodate a controller card, which enables it to report
inventory information. The Artemis-2A must be connected to a power source to enable the controller
card to operate.
The Artemis-2A supports Artemis passive cards, as well as passive cards of the Apollo product line.
The Artemis-2A platform has a default configuration of four single slots. These slots can be configured
as two double slots or one quad slot by removing the divider brackets between the single slots.
NOTE: Mix of two single slots and one double slot is also supported in the Artemis-2A.
13.2.3 Artemis-2PE
The Artemis-2PE is a 2U platform housed in a 239.5 mm (9.43 in.) deep, 443 mm (17.4 in.) wide, and
87.9 mm (3.46 in.) high equipment cage. The Artemis-2PE features a highly flexible structure with a
significantly small footprint.
The Artemis-2PE supports the Artemis passive cards, as well as the passive cards of the Apollo
product line.
The Artemis-2PE has a default configuration of four single slots. At the customer site, the platform can
be configured, using the appropriate divider brackets, into various slot combinations, including:
Up to four single slots (default)
One or two double slots
One quad slot
Any combinations of quad, double, or single slots that fit into the platform frame
The following figures illustrate a few of the slot configuration options in the Artemis-2PE.
13.2.4 Artemis-4A
The Artemis-4A is a 4U platform housed in a 239.5 mm (9.43 in.) deep, 443 mm (17.4 in.) wide, and
175.8 mm (6.92 in.) high equipment cage. The Artemis-4A features a highly flexible structure with a
significantly small footprint. All modules can be inserted even when the platform delivers live traffic
without affecting it. The platform can accommodate a controller card, which enables it to report
inventory information. The Artemis-4A must be connected to a power source to enable the controller
card to operate.
The Artemis-4A supports Artemis passive cards, as well as passive cards of the Apollo product line.
The Artemis-4A platform has a default configuration of eight single slots. These slots can be configured
in different options to form double slots and quad slots by removing the divider brackets between the
single slots.
NOTE: Any combinations of single slots, double slots, and quad slots are supported in the
Artemis-4A.
NOTE: In this manual the generic name PDU or PDUxx is used to describe features and
functions that are common to all three PDU55AL, PDU77AL, and PDU99 units.
A front cover protects the access to the PDU's terminal blocks, power connectors, and circuit breakers.
To gain access to the parts in the PDU this cover must be removed.
The following figure shows a general view of the PDU55AL (the general view of the PDU77AL is
similar). PDU99 has a cover without LEDs.
14.1.1 PDU55AL
The PDU55AL is a power distribution unit installed in racks for loads (platforms) that consume up to 12
kW.
The PDU55AL performs the following main functions:
Redundant power distribution for five loads consuming up to 12 kW. The PDU55AL can
supply power to five loads, each with a power consumption of up to 2400 W. Each load works with
two power sources, where one is the main source (A) and the second is an optional protective
backup source (B).
Bay alarm indications. The PDU55AL includes three alarm indicators, one for each alarm
severity. When alarms of different severities are received simultaneously, the corresponding alarm
indications light simultaneously.
A buzzer is activated whenever an alarm is present in platforms connected to the PDU55AL. The
buzzer can be shut off by pressing an ACO button on the corresponding platform (xTAM card).
This action doesn't clear the alarm.
Connecting external alarms from three platforms, each platform supporting up to four alarm
inputs, totaling up to 12 alarm inputs in the PDU55AL. Alarm inputs are implemented by
optocoupler circuits.
The PDU55AL also supports up to 8 alarm outputs, implemented by relay dry contacts, each with
NO and NC positions. Four alarm outputs are allocated to SHELF 1. SHELF 2 and SHELF 3 have
2 alarm outputs each.
Exporting severity alarms. Three separate groups of severity alarms (a group of four (Critical,
Major, Minor, and buzzer) for each platform) are provided via dry contacts for the customer's
central alarm monitoring system.
Equipment cable wiring. Use proper cable to feed the equipment, tighten the PDU connectors
and secure two flat screws with a flat screwdriver.
Feeding cables and wiring. Use proper two hole ring terminal (45° or 90°) for the feeding
connections. Crimp the terminal using proper crimp tools. Add a shrink tube on the neck of each
ring terminal to prevent touching the wiring by accident. Tighten the nuts securely on the PDU
connectors using a ratchet and 10mm socket.
CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to secure the connector as this may
cause damage.
The PDU55AL terminal blocks, connectors, and circuit breakers are located on its main board, as
shown in the following figure. The table lists the component functions. The marking in the table
correspond to those in the figures.
NOTE: The description in the table below refers to left side (source A) components of the
PDU55AL. The right side (source B) is a mirror image of the left side and the description is
therefore identical.
The following figure shows the PDUxxAL Alarms board, and the table lists the functions of the
components corresponding to the figure.
The PDU55AL supplies independent streams of power to five separate loads. Input power circuits (A1
to A5) for each load is kept completely separate from the input power for the others. Separate input
power cables from the power sources feed into independent circuit breakers on the PDU55AL. (There
are a total of ten circuit breakers on the PDU55AL, supporting redundant power supplies for up to five
loads).
The PDU55AL has ten 5W5 DC output connectors for supplying redundant power to the supported
platforms (OPT9914, OPT9624, OPT9608). The maximum power supplied to each output is up to 2400
W.
The connection of the power sources to the PDU55AL is made through ten pairs of 35 mm2 power
cables from the user's power supply sources (five for each source) and circuit breakers do not have to
be more than 60 A, because the maximum power consumption per cable is never more than 2400 W.
Each input circuit is monitored by a LED. The ten LEDs, located at the middle of the main board, enable
the user to view the status of each input circuit at a glance. This saves the need to connect test
equipment, in case troubleshooting is required.
The nominal DC power voltage is -48 VDC however the input voltage can range from -40.8 VDC
to -57.6 VDC. The internal circuits of the PDU55AL are powered whenever at least one power source is
connected. The required circuit breakers are included in the installation parts kit supplied with the
platforms, and therefore their current rating is in accordance with the order requirements.
14.1.2 PDU77AL
The PDU77AL is a power distribution unit installed in the rack for loads (platforms) that consume up to
12 kW.
The PDU77AL performs the following main functions:
Redundant power distribution for seven loads consuming up to 12 kW. The PDU77AL can
supply power to seven loads, three with a power consumption of up to 2400 W and four with a
power consumption of up to 1200 W each. Each load works with two power sources, where one is
the main source (A) and the second is an optional protective backup source (B).
Bay alarm indications. The PDU77AL includes three alarm indicators, one for each alarm
severity. When alarms of different severities are received simultaneously, the corresponding alarm
indications light simultaneously.
A buzzer is activated whenever an alarm is present in platforms connected to the PDU77AL. The
buzzer can be shut off by pressing an ACO button on the corresponding platform (xTAM card).
This action doesn't clear the alarm.
Connecting external alarms from three platforms, each platform supporting up to four alarm
inputs, totaling up to 12 alarm inputs in the PDU77AL. Alarm inputs are implemented by
optocoupler circuits.
The PDU77AL also supports up to 8 alarm outputs, implemented by relay dry contacts, each with
NO and NC positions. Four alarm outputs are allocated to SHELF 1. SHELF 2 and SHELF 3 have
2 alarm outputs each.
Exporting severity alarms. Three separate groups of severity alarms (a group of four (Critical,
Major, Minor, and buzzer) for each platform) are provided via dry contacts for the customer's
central alarm monitoring system.
Equipment cable wiring. Use proper cable to feed the equipment, tighten the PDU connectors
and secure two flat screws with a flat screwdriver.
Feeding cables and wiring. Use proper two hole ring terminal (45° or 90°) for the feeding
connections. Crimp the terminal using proper crimp tools. Add a shrink tube on the neck of each
ring terminal to prevent touching the wiring by accident. Tighten the nuts securely on the PDU
connectors using a ratchet and 10mm socket.
CAUTION: Do not exert excessive tightening torque to secure the connector as this may
cause damage.
The following figure shows the front panel of the PDUxxAL, and the table lists the functions of the front
panel components corresponding to the figure callouts.
NOTE: The description in the table below refers to left side (source A) components of the
PDU77AL. The right side (source B) is a mirror image of the left side and the description is
therefore identical.
The following figure shows the PDUxxAL Alarms board, and the table lists the functions of the
components corresponding to the figure.
Designation Function
SHELF 1, SHELF 2, SHELF 3 Three 36-pin SCSI connectors, designated SHELF 1, SHELF 2, and
SHELF 3 used to connect alarm cables to the Apollo platforms installed
in the rack. These cables transmit alarms from the Apollo platform to the
PDUxxAL unit.
ALARM IN/OUT 68-pin SCSI connector, used to connect an alarm cable to the customer
alarm monitoring system. This alarm cable transmits the alarms
received from the Apollo platforms by the SHELF 1, SHELF 2 and
SHELF 3 connectors, including external alarm inputs, external alarm
outputs, and Apollo severity alarms.
TEST Pushbutton for activating the buzzer and turning on the indicators for
test purposes.
ON (power) Green indicator, lights when at least one DC power source is connected
to the PDUxxAL.
CRITICAL Red indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged alarm in
the platforms connected to the PDUxxAL is Critical.
MAJOR Orange indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged alarm
in the platforms connected to the PDUxxAL is Major.
MINOR Yellow indicator, lights when the severity of an unacknowledged alarm
in the platforms connected to the PDUxxAL is Minor.
Each input circuit is monitored by a LED. The ten LEDs, located at the middle of the main board, enable
the user to view the status of each input circuit at a glance. This saves the need to connect test
equipment, in case troubleshooting is required.
The nominal DC power voltage is -48 VDC however the input voltage can range from -40.8 VDC
to -57.6 VDC. The internal circuits of the PDU77AL are powered whenever at least one power source is
connected. The required circuit breakers are included in the installation parts kit supplied with the
platforms, and therefore their current rating is in accordance with the order requirements.
14.1.3 PDU99
The PDU99 is a power distribution unit installed in the racks for loads (platforms) that consume up to 12
kW.
WARNINGS:
PDU99 must be installed only above concrete or other non-combustible surfaces.
Only trained, qualified personnel should install, maintain, or replace the PDU99
The following figure shows the front panel of the PDU99, and the table lists the functions of the front
panel components corresponding to the figure callouts. Front panel components are accessed by lifting
the PDU99 front cover.
NOTE: The description in the table below refers to left side (source A) components of the
PDU99. The right side (source B) is a mirror image of the left side and the description is
therefore identical.
Each input source is monitored by a green LED. The two LEDs, located at the middle of the main
board, enable the user to view the status of each input source.
The nominal DC power voltage is 48 VDC, however the input voltage can range from -40.8 VDC to 57.6
VDC. The internal circuits of the PDU99 are powered whenever at least one power source is
connected. The required circuit breakers are included in the installation parts kit supplied with the
platforms, and therefore their current rating is in accordance with the order requirements.
14.2 RAP-E
The RAP-E is a power distribution and alarm panel installed in the rack for platforms that consume
more than 3000 W.
NOTE: The RAP-E supports power supply for any platform that consumes more than
3000 W in any of the following product lines:
Apollo product line
Neptune product line
XDM product line
An example of the power supply flow for two XDM-3000 platforms is illustrated in the following
figure. Note that in the case of XDM-3000 only three out of the four DC circuits of the RAP-E are
used.
The RAP-E has eight 5-pin DC output connectors for supplying redundant power to the supported
platforms. The maximum power supplied to each platform is up to 4500 W, in accordance with the
platform type.
Note that with the default configuration, the power cables from the user's power supply sources to
the RAP-E do not have to be more than 25 mm2 thick, and the circuit breakers do not have to be
more than 65A, because the maximum power consumption per cable is never more than 2250 W.
Redundant power distribution for one platform. The RAP-E can support power supply to one
platform. In this case the platform works with two power sources, where one is the main source
(A) and the second is an optional protective backup source (B). Separate input power cables from
the power sources feed into independent circuit breakers on the RAP-E unit. (There are a total of
four circuit breakers installed in this case). The power supply flow for a single platform is illustrated
in the following figure.
The nominal DC power voltage is -48 VDC ranging to -72 VDC. The internal circuits of the RAP-E
are powered whenever at least one power source is connected. The presence of DC power within
the RAP-E is indicated by a POWER ON indicator.
Each DC power circuit of each platform is protected by two circuit breakers that also serve as a
power on/off switch for the corresponding circuit. The required circuit breakers are included in the
installation parts kit supplied with the platforms, and therefore their current rating is in accordance
with the order requirements.
The circuit breakers are installed during the RAP-E installation. To prevent accidental changing of
a circuit breaker’s state, the circuit breakers can be reached easily after opening the front cover of
the RAP-E. The circuit breaker state (ON or OFF) can be seen through openings in the RAP-E
cover.
Bay alarm indications. The RAP-E includes three alarm indicators, one for each alarm severity.
When alarms of different severities are received simultaneously, the corresponding alarm
indications light simultaneously.
A buzzer is activated whenever an alarm is present in platforms connected to the RAP-E. The
buzzer can be shut off by pressing an ACO button on the corresponding platform. This action
doesn't clear the alarm.
Connecting external alarms from two platforms, each platform supporting up to four alarm inputs
and four alarm outputs (via dry contacts) to the customer's central alarm monitoring system.
Customers who wish to define external alarms should refer to the explanation of the dry contacts
electrical maximum rating requirements for external alarms in the System Specification.
Note that the RAP-E supports up to eight input and output external alarms. These alarms are
allocated four to each platform.
Exporting severity alarms. Two separate groups of severity alarms (a group of four (Critical,
Major, Minor, and buzzer) for each platform) are provided via dry contacts for the customer's
central alarm monitoring system.
The following figure shows the front panel of the RAP-E, and the table lists the functions of the front
panel components corresponding to the figure callout numbers.
The RAP-E connectors are located on the circuit board, as shown in the following figure. The table lists
the connector functions. The index numbers in the table correspond to those in the figures.
RAP-E connectors
14.3 xRAP-100
The xRAP-100 is a power distribution and alarm panel for platforms installed in racks.
NOTE: The xRAP-100 supports power supply for the following product lines:
BG product line
XDM-100
OPT96xx product line
Each power source can be connected to the xRAP-100 with a dual input line; we will designate
this option as dual input power cable configuration (for feeding platforms like the OPT96xx product
line). However, in the default configuration, the xRAP-100 is supplied with bridge components,
connecting the negative terminals of the two power input lines. This enables users to connect the
unit with an up to 50 mm2 single input power cable. When feeding with dual input power cable
configuration is preferred, the bridge components must be removed.
Power is connected through four independent circuit breakers to three 3-pin and one 5-pin output
connectors for feeding the platforms. The total power that can be provided by the unit is 5.2 kW
maximum. The power is equally distributed via each input power line: 2600 W to two 3-pin
connectors (up to 1300 W per platform), and 2600 W to the third 3-pin and to the 5-pin
connectors. The 5-pin output power connector can feed a high-power platform (for example, XDM-
1000 requiring 2200 W). In such a case, the third 3-pin connector is able to provide the rest of the
power (in this example, 2600 - 2200 = 400 W). We recommend not using the third 3-pin connector
when a high-power platform is connected.
NOTE: The xRAP-100 can provide power to four 9600 platforms. In this case, three of
them are connected to the 3-pin and one to the 5-pin D-type connectors.
Note that with the dual input cable configuration, the power cables from the user's power supply
sources to the xRAP-100 do not have to be more than 25 mm2 thick, and the circuit breakers do
not have to be more than 32A, except for the circuit breaker connected to the 5-pin connector that
can be up to 65A because the maximum power consumption per cable is never more than 2600
W. The xRAP-100 reflects the response to the need of customers who are not able to support 50
mm2 feeding power cables when connecting four platforms.
NOTE: Users who prefer to work with a single power cable from their main power supply
(and optionally, a single power cable from the protective power supply) can still work with a
single cable if they:
Work with a single 25 mm2 power cable to support two platforms only, with a maximum
of 2600 W for both platforms, where each platform is limited to a maximum of 1300 W
per platform.
Work with a single 25 mm2 power cable to support four platforms, where each platform
is limited to a maximum of 650 W per platform. This configuration option requires the
use of the metal bridge component supplied for this purpose.
Work with a single 50 mm2 power cable to support four platforms with a maximum of
1300 W for each platform. This configuration option requires the use of the metal
bridge component supplied for this purpose.
The nominal DC power voltage is -48 VDC ranging to -72 VDC. The internal circuits of the xRAP-
100 are powered whenever at least one power source is connected. The presence of DC power
within the xRAP-100 is indicated by a POWER ON indicator.
Each DC power circuit of each platform is protected by a circuit breaker that also serves as a
power on/off switch for the corresponding circuit. The required circuit breakers are included in the
installation parts kit supplied with the platforms, and therefore their current rating is in accordance
with the order requirements. To prevent accidentally changing a circuit breaker state, the circuit
breakers can be reached only after removing the xRAP-100 front cover. The circuit breaker state
(ON/OFF) can be seen through openings in the cover.
NOTE: For connecting an OPT96xx platform to the 5-pin connector, use a 5-pin D-type
male to 2-pin D-type female cable.
Bay alarm indications: The xRAP-100 includes three alarm indicators, one for each alarm
severity. When alarms of different severities are received simultaneously, the different alarm
indications light simultaneously.
NOTE: BG platforms support only two alarm indications: Major and Minor.
A buzzer is activated whenever a Major or Critical alarm is present in a XDM platform connected
to the xRAP-100 or a Major alarm in a BG or OPT96xx platform connected to the xRAP-100.
Connection of alarms from up to four supported platforms, each with maximum four alarm inputs
and two alarm outputs.
The following figure shows the front panel of the xRAP-100, and the table lists the functions of the front
panel components corresponding to the figure callout numbers.
The xRAP-100 connectors are located on its circuit board, as shown in the following figure. The table
lists the connector functions. The index numbers in the table correspond to those in the figure.
xRAP-100 connectors
xRAP-100 connectors
No. Designation Function
1, 2, 3, 4 Shelf alarms Four 36-pin SCSI connectors designated SHELF 1, SHELF 2,
SHELF 3, and SHELF 4, for connecting alarm input and output lines
to the platforms and other equipment installed in the rack
5 ALARM IN/OUT 68-pin SCSI connector, for connecting alarm input and output lines
to the customer alarm monitoring facility
6, 7, 8 Platforms DC input power Three 3-pin D-type connectors designated Shelf 1, Shelf 2, and
Shelf 3 for connecting DC power to regular power platforms
9 Shelf DC input, high power 5-pin D-type connector designated Shelf 4 for connecting a high or
regular power platform
14.4 RAP-4B
The RAP-4B is a power distribution and alarm panel for platforms installed in racks.
NOTE: The RAP-4B supports operation with BG, XDM (100, 300, 900), Neptune, and
OPT96xx platforms.
NOTE: The maximum power that can be supplied by the RAP-4B to a single platform is
not more than 1.1 kW.
The circuit breakers are installed during the RAP-4B installation. To prevent accidentally changing
a circuit breaker state, the circuit breakers can be reached only after removing the RAP-4B front
cover. The circuit breaker state (ON/OFF) can be seen through translucent covers.
Bay alarm indications: The RAP-4B includes three alarm indicators, one for each alarm severity.
When alarms of different severities are received simultaneously, the different alarm indications
light simultaneously.
NOTE: BG platforms support only two alarm indications, Major and Minor.
A buzzer is activated whenever a Major or Critical alarm is present in an XDM platform or a Major
alarm in a BG or 96xx platform connected to the RAP-4B.
Connection of alarms from up to four platforms, with max. four alarm inputs and two alarm
outputs.
The following figure shows the front panel of the RAP-4B, and the table lists the functions of the front
panel components corresponding to the figure callout numbers.
The RAP-4B alarm connectors are on its circuit board, as shown in the following figure. The table lists
the connector functions. The index numbers in the table correspond to those in the figure.
The AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 system has connectors for connecting the load, batteries, AC source, and
the system alarms, at the rear of the unit. It also includes circuit breakers that protect the power supply
against load overcurrent at the battery and rectifier outputs.
The CSU-502 module provides control and monitoring functions. It is supplied preconfigured, ready for
immediate use. It supports system voltage, load current, status, and alarms that can be changed and
displayed on the LCD display.
The AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 platform is preconfigured for fast installation and setup. All system settings
are fully software-configured and stored in transferable configuration files for repeated one-step system
setup.
The AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 platform is supplied with two kits of brackets for installation in 19" or ETSI
racks.
The following main features are supported by the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 power system:
19"/ETSI power platform for 48 VDC @ 2250 W (max.) in non-redundant application
Single phase 100-240 VAC input source
Three DPR-850B-48 rectifier units
Light weight plug-in modules for simple installation and maintenance
Hot swappable rectifier and control modules
Front access to the circuit breakers and control module for simplified operation and maintenance
To enable understanding enlarged views of sections on the rear panel are provided in the following
figures.
The AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 detailed battery and load connections are shown in the following figure.
The AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 AC source and alarm connections are shown in the following figure.
The following table describers the AC/DC-DPS850-48-3 rear panel component functions (connections).
The two power systems are identical in features, functionality, and physical dimension and differ only in
the maximum output power capability.
IMPORTANT: Each AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW system must be equipped with rectifiers of the
same type. Mixing rectifiers of different types is not allowed. For example, if an AC/DC PS
6kW is configured, the three rectifiers must be DPR 2000.
Each power system includes a number of DPR 2000/DPR 2900 rectifier units, an CU-19C A controller
unit, and a Power Distribution Unit (PDU), all enclosed in a 482 x 299 x 88 mm (W x D x H) platform. All
connections to the system are made from the rear on the PDU.
The rectifiers are connected in parallel in a redundant (n+1) load-sharing mode. The current-sharing
mode enables each rectifier to supply an equal load current, thus increasing system reliability. In case a
failure occurs in one of the units, the current drawn from the other rectifiers is increased to supply the
required load current. The DPR 2000/DPR 2900 is designed for online replacement (hot-swappable) to
support non-traffic-affecting operation of telecommunication equipment.
In addition, to support high availability, the system has an option to connect to two sets of backup
batteries. In this case, while the system is operating normally it also charges the batteries in addition to
supplying power to the load. If the AC source fails, the batteries, which are connected on the rectifier
output bus, supply the load current.
The state-of-the-art power supply is designed to match constant-power characteristics of modern
telecom loads, and thus reduces the number of rectifiers required in battery backed-up systems. The
AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW features a modular architecture for easy system maintenance.
The AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW system PDU has terminals for connecting the load, battery, AC source, and
system alarms. It also includes circuit breakers that protect the power supply against load overcurrent
at the battery and rectifier outputs.
The CU-19C A module provides control and monitoring functions. It is supplied preconfigured, ready for
immediate use. It supports system voltage, load current, status, and alarms that can be changed and
displayed on the LCD display.
The AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW platform is preconfigured for fast installation and setup. All system settings are
fully software-configured and stored in transferable configuration files for repeated one-step system
setup.
The following table describes the AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW front view components.
To facilitate understanding enlarged views of sections on the rear panel are provided in the following
figures.
The AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW detailed dry contact relay and sensor connections are depicted in the following
figure.
The AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW detailed battery and load connections are shown in the following figure.
The AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW AC power source connections are shown in the following figure.
AC source connections
The following table describers the AC/DC PS 6/8.7kW rear panel component functions (connections).
- Ground
The connections must be made with 3 x 10 mm2 cables.
14.7.1 FST
When optical modules are used, platforms can be supplied with an FST where a length of surplus
optical fiber is stored to enable hot module replacement without disconnecting fibers from other
modules in the platform. The FST can hold up to 48 fibers, where the fiber size is 3 m x 2 mm
(10 ft. x 0.08 in.).
The FST can be opened in two positions:
Halfway (first click when pulling the tray out)
Completely (to enable threading of the fibers in the tray)
The spooler units are attached to the rack frame using the two anchoring panels on the two sides. Fiber
cables are wrapped in a figure-eight pattern around the four storage posts in the spooler. These posts
are large enough to accommodate a large number of fibers that can be part of a typical installation. The
following figure illustrates the depth of the fiber storage area available within the spooler.
The Apollo series supports the following methods for PRC distribution over PSN:
SyncE, according to G.8261 and G.8264 carried over Ethernet physical links between NEs.
IEEE 1588v2 (PTP), a packet-based method supporting master and slave modes.
Apollo synchronization filters distribute frequency and phase/time timing over an out-of-band Optical
Timing Channel (OTC) over WDM links through the bi-directional wavelength, on single fiber.
xCTM2 architecture
Synchronous Ethernet
xCTM2 support for SyncE
In SyncE modes, the xCTM2 receives a PRC reference timing signal through an external clock port.
The clock signal is extracted and processed by an internal synchronization function that includes jitter
filtering before adding timing to the Ethernet bit stream. SyncE distributes frequency synchronization
only. These modes cannot be used for phase or ToD synchronization.
As illustrated in the preceding figure, there may be a number of platforms involved in reference timing
signal distribution, with each platform capable of recovering synchronization line timing from the
incoming bit stream. SyncE clock recovery performance is independent of network load.
To avoid timing loops, each NE should automatically send a Do Not Use (DNU) message back to the
direct source NE from which it receives a timing signal. This ensures that the source NEs do not receive
back their own timing signals from the current NE.
PTP (1588v2)
Precision Time Protocol (PTP) is based on the IEEE1588v2 standard. This standard defines a
packet-based method for frequency, phase, and time synchronization via Packet Switched Networks
(PSN). PTP is a Client-Server hierarchy protocol; it enables client synchronization on the server’s clock
domain by exchanging special packets (PTP packets) between client and server.
The PTP server is referred to as the PTP Master clock. The PTP client is referred to as the PTP Slave
clock. The Master clock is connected to a clock source (freq, phase, time) such as a GPS receiver and
uses PTP packets to distribute the timing information towards the Slave clock. The Slave clock uses
these PTP packets to recover timing information (freq, phase, time) that can then be provided to a
directly-connected CE, such as an LTE base station. This master/slave configuration is illustrated in the
following figure.
NOTE: The 2.048 MHz signal does not indicate the quality level of the source generating
the timing information.
ToP recovered clock: Used in ToP slave mode, the device locks to PTP timing packets and
implements IEEE 1588v2 slave functions.
External 1588_In: External 1588v2 inputs (such as GPS) for reference clock, 1PPS, ToD.
Free running: OCXO used as free running clock, compliant with Stratum 3E. Devices revert to
free-run mode after a power-on or device reset.
Line timing: I/O cards can recover the Ethernet clock signals (respectively) that were received
and pass them on as reference clock signals to the xCTM2. These signals can then be used to
synchronize all outgoing Ethernet/OTN interfaces with the same selected reference clocks.
Mate xCTM2: Each xCTM2 provides its mate with a reference clock.
BITS_out (T4): Optional, used to synchronize other equipment. When working with redundant
xCTM2 modules, BITS output is only enabled for the active xCTM2.
1588_Out: xCTM2 has 1588v2 outputs (reference clock, 1PPS(1Hz), ToD(UART)).
The internal 1PPS pulse and ToD is used for RTC register synchronization on I/O cards with RTC
registers on xCTM2. RTC is used for timestamping PTP packets when a packet is either received
from or transmitted to the network. The PTP packet timestamps are used for clock, phase, and
time recovery by the PTP block. 1588_Out signals can drive external 1588 interface (Clock, 1PPS,
ToD) for monitoring or external equipment connectivity.
T0 and MF: xCTM2 drives T0 (125MHz) and Multi Frame (MF) (8KHz) to synchronize I/O card
transmission clocks.
PTP Massage Out: ToP module in xCTM2 generates PTP Massages in 1588v2 Master mode.
Holdover mode refers to the operating condition of a clock that has lost its reference and is controlling
the output signal using previously acquired data. The holdover value is usually an average value
calculated over some period of time to minimize the impact of short term variations in the reference
frequency that may occur during normal operation.
The xCTM2 module is a universal component that is used in most of the Apollo platforms. Obviously,
the xCTM2 works together with different types of cards, depending on the specific platform type and
configuration.
Timing sources
Users may configure multiple reference clock sources for the xCTM2 (out of a maximum of 32 possible
clocks) as input timing sources. These reference clocks are in addition to the BITS_in, 1588v2, and free
running clock inputs.
Priority values are assigned to an NE's synchronization sources, with preferred sources assigned a
higher priority level.
ESMC
Clock quality level indications are transmitted as part of a protocol running over SyncE links. Two types
of messages are defined for this protocol:
A continuous stream of 1s sent as a background (heartbeat) message, providing a continuous
indication of clock quality level.
An event message indicating a new SSM quality level. When a sync source signal recovers from a
failure condition, the source is considered available for selection after the signal fail indicator has
been cleared at a minimum for the time defined by WTR (5 min to 12 min).
To protect against possible failure, a lack of messages is considered a failure condition. The SSM value
is set to DNU if no SSM messages are received after a 5 sec period.
NOTE: For PTP synchronization, xCTM2 cards operate in 1:1 mode since only one
xCTM2 participates in the protocol sessions.
OMSP protection
NOTES:
When configuring service card protection on signal failure for single slot cards, the OLP and
service card must be placed in associated protection slot pairs.
In the OPT9603, service card protection on signal failure is not supported for double slot
cards.
Oscillation prevention
When a fault is initially detected, the OLP immediately initiates a protection switch. However, to avoid
oscillations, the next switch is allowed only after one minute, a third switch is allowed only after two
minutes, and so on. Each switching incident increases the waiting time, up to a maximum of 64
minutes. When all faults are cleared, with a clean stabilization time of 7 seconds, the waiting time is
also reset.
OCH port protection is currently the most popular optical protection method for the optical layer. The
mechanism transports each optical channel in two directions, clockwise and counterclockwise. The
shortest path is defined as the main or working channel; the longer path as the protection channel.
The main benefit of OCH port protection is its ability to separately choose the shortest path as the
working path for each client port. There are no dedicated working and protection fibers. Each fiber
carries traffic with both working and protection signals in a single direction.
The OCH 1+1 port protection scheme provides separate protection for each client port. For
SDH/SONET, GbE, and 10G, protection switching is based on PM parameters. Switching criteria can
be Loss of Signal (LOS), Loss of Frame (LOF), or Degraded Signal (SD). The switch-to-protection
mode is automatic when a malfunction is detected in a single channel. This is very convenient as users
can choose the client ports to be protected, as well as choosing the main or protection paths.
Switch-to-protection time in the OCH 1+1 port protection scheme is less than 50 msec.
Usage guidelines
Multi-mode transceivers cannot be used to configure OCH 1+1 port protection, because the signal
intensity could be below the sensitivity lower limit of the transponder.
In platforms from the OPT96xx family, port protection must be configured between cards in
adjacent slots (#N and #N+2), assigning matching port numbers on the two cards.
In platforms from the OPT99xx family, port protection can be configured between any two ports on
any two cards in any two slots. The slots do not have to be adjacent, and the port numbers do not
have to be identical.
SNC-N points
SNC-N points may exist at the trail endpoints and also within the network. SNC-N protection is relevant
for all Apollo platforms, configured with or without matrix cards, since SNC-N points exist in both service
and matrix cards.
The following figure displays a simple DNI configuration, with two independent NEs serving as the
connection points between two rings. Each NE receives traffic either from other NEs in the same ring or
from NEs in the other ring. Based on SNC-N at the ODU level, NEs decide which signal to process.
ODU DNI and DRI protection is relevant for all Apollo platforms, configured with or without matrix cards.
Y-protection example
When used in ring applications the AoC supports optical DRI protection, illustrated in the following
figure. (Note that inter-ring traffic is through OTU1 client ports.)
N+1 protection
The following illustrates a typical example of N+1 optical protection based on the WSS ROADM. This
configuration includes one main route and two protection routes, segments of which can be used for
restoration. For each working primary route, up to 15 secondary routes can be configured. All the routes
are set automatically through the management system. If the primary working route fails, the system
switches automatically to the Secondary 1 route. If the Secondary 1 route also fails, the Secondary 2
route is automatically activated. Protection routes can be kept active and dedicated to shorten
restoration time.
Optical DRI
Optical DRI protection uses a single NE to bridge two rings. In a typical example of optical DRI
protection, a single connection point is used to close two rings, providing protection for scenarios that
include two fiber cuts. Optical DRI trails are created automatically by LightSOFT.
The preceding figure portrays two endpoints linked by main and protection paths. Two links are
configured between the two paths, represented by the X-shape link topology in the center of the figure.
The first fiber cut on the main path (labeled A), triggers a switch at both endpoints from the main path to
the protection path. A second fiber cut on the protection path (labeled B), triggers a switch at the
appropriate points from the protection path back to the main path. After each fiber cut, the optical
equipment used at the DRI-configured nodes at either end of the DRI links must also switch their
internal Rx/Tx settings accordingly.
With enhanced optical DNI, a single BD link is configured between the two paths. The OCH trail is
defined as asymmetrical, using a different channel in each direction. This prevents signal overlapping
over the link connecting the two paths.
Using WSS for restoration is exceptionally cost effective for 40G and 100G wavelengths as no OEO
cross connection is necessary. Routing is completed optically automatically by the WSS ROADM
according to the wavelength provisioning via LightSOFT.
Network management via the control plane, especially when combined with advances in DWDM
hardware such as ODU-XC fabric for OTN switching or multi-degree ROADMs with colorless,
directionless, and contentionless (CDC) switching for OTN transport (or both), give operators the
following benefits:
Network availability: Availability is improved, as the network is tolerant of multiple failures, with
the ability to reroute wavelengths without complex re-planning exercises and service calls.
Network optimization: Network topology is modified over a period of time, as service
requirements change. The optical-aware WSON/SSON control plane helps to optimize and reduce
or eliminate network fragmentation.
Wavelength on demand: Time to market is significantly improved with rapid service setup. There
is no need for complicated network planning; a simplified GUI as well as script-oriented (CLI)
User-Network Interface (UNI) allows users to dynamically demand wavelength services across
DWDM networks.
Cost savings: With this intelligent control plane, operators can now efficiently use the benefits of
switching components such as ODU-XC fabric or ROADMs, and reduce the number of ODUs or
wavelengths and I/O service cards needed in the network. Affecting the lowest layer in the
network, this directly translates to savings not just in DWDM equipment, but also in ports at
higher-layer equipment (cross-connects and routers), resulting in tremendous CapEx savings for
operators.
Value-added services: The control plane provides dynamic rerouting capabilities, allowing
service providers to offer services with new SLA levels in addition to their present modes of
operations.
Our platforms provide a variety of bandwidth-efficient protection and restoration schemes, while
supporting ring, mesh, and point-to-point network topologies. Recovery modes include a range of
protection mechanisms and mesh restoration modes. ASON/WSON/SSON capabilities offer new types
of restoration schemes, increasing network survivability with, for example, optical 1++ protection for
very high CoS services, and optical 1+1 and 1+R protection for low CoS services.
Our platforms offer control plane architecture, capable of offering intelligent services in mesh transport
networks over colorless, directionless, and contentionless configurations. This is achieved by adding a
GMPLS control plane that enhances network functionality by adding restoration to the sub-50 msec
protection schemes for multiple failure (optical 1++ services) and automated service provisioning. It also
adds other capabilities that contribute to reduced CAPEX and OPEX. The Apollo control plane
architecture, protocols, and functionalities are described in this section.
The ASON/WSON/SSON family solutions are based on the "Add-On" concept, adding unique
capabilities to existing and new networks. Expandable and scalable, the inter-compatible product line
supports seamless integration of NEs with dynamic E2E WSON/SSON-based applications.
ASON/WSON architecture
The IETF has defined the well-known GMPLS architecture and protocols, extending MPLS for
circuit-switching and other non-IP-based systems. GMPLS protocols include signaling protocols
(RSVP-TE), routing protocols (OSPF-TE), and others.
The GMPLS protocols enable advanced switching platforms such as Apollo to add “intelligence” by
integrating a control plane.
The OIF focuses on integration and interoperability issues by defining the User to Network Interface
(UNI) and the External Network to Network Interface (E-NNI). These standards cover the gaps
between ASON, WSON and GMPLS architectures, enabling a smoother integration of carrier networks.
Apollo supports WSON functionality through built-in DWDM layers based on state-of-the-art ROADM
modules with colorless, directionless, contentionless, and gridless (Flex-Grid) configurations (CDCF).
Directionless switching enables the ROADM to automatically select the direction of the add/drop
wavelength without having to physically visit the site and connect the fiber to the required port.
Colorless switching enables remote wavelength retuning of add/drop wavelengths, again, without
the need visit the site. With this architecture, an add/drop port can be assigned to any wavelength
and coupled to any direction(s) in a fully flexible fashion. The colorless feature is implemented
utilizing the TFA card, drop configured for direct colorless operation.
Contentionless switching means that two or more services can be transmitted from the site in
different directions using the same wavelength channel.
Gridless/flexible grid network, as defined in the G.694.1 WDM wavelength grid specification. This
standard divides the wavelengths available in the C-band spectrum into 'slices', with a granularity
of 12.5GHz. Flex-Grid's finer granularity enables optimal usage of the available bandwidth.
Groups of 12.5GHz spacing can be combined into whatever size is required, including Super
Channel spectral widths of N x 12.5GHz, accommodating any combination of optical carriers,
modulations, and data rates.
WDM cards can be added in any of Apollo slots in the same cage with or without the ODU-XC fabric
and service cards. 10G, 40G, and 100G channels are supported with a choice of 100 GHz spacing
(48 channels) and 50 GHz spacing (96 channels) or flexible grid network design. Both mixed and pure
coherent networks are available.
The Apollo transport plane supports standard-compliant Automatic Discovery and DCN, critical for the
implementation of ASON and WSON architecture.
Path computation
The protection and restoration capabilities of links and the Shared Risk Link Groups (SRLG) associated
with links can also be advertised by the routing protocols. Based on the Physical layer, SRLG
constrains the information and capabilities provided by the GMPLS routing and signaling protocols. The
path computation algorithm CSPF (Constrained Shortest Path First) can select disjointed paths based
on link, node, or SRLG diversity.
One of the control plane objectives is to reuse the main-LSP resources for the restoration-LSP where
possible. When working with Flex-grid, there might be scenarios where only part of the resources can
be reused.
LightSOFT monitors ASON/WSON link status. An icon next to the A/W shield reflects the link’s
operational state (up/down/degraded/mismatch), and a new field reflecting it has been added to the link
properties window.
Restoration modes
GMPLS restoration can be implemented in one of the following modes:
On-the-fly: If a fiber cut or some other LOS condition is detected, the head-end dynamically
calculates the best possible restoration path 'on the fly', using an intelligent CSPF algorithm.
Pre-planned: The network prepares in advance a list of all possible failure scenarios. If a fiber cut
or some other LOS condition is detected, the head-end searches in the table to choose the most
appropriate restoration path. If the head-end doesn't find any appropriate path in the table, the
system automatically reverts to on-the-fly mode.
Coloring
Network operators can use 'coloring' of the network to designate a restoration area. Coloring limits the
area within which a service can be restored to a specific subset of the network.
LightSOFT simplifies provisioning and day-to-day monitoring of optical services. Information on light
paths, wavelengths, channel availability, rates, is available through lists of optical links and trails.
LightSOFT provides fully automated optical trail provisioning, eliminating the need for operator
intervention at the EMS level. Automatic trail provisioning is also vital in networks based on ROADMs
and ODU cross-connects. ASON and WSON working at the wavelength and sub-wavelength levels
allow creation of complex mesh and ring network topologies. LightSOFT and STMS, working at the
NMS and EMS levels, are coordinated with the LightPLAN planning tool for full plug and play
automation.
Regeneration pool
The regeneration pool/bank allows operators to minimize allocation of regenerators, in order to support
a given traffic matrix without sacrificing network survivability.
The goal is to design an allocation strategy that supports full demand while also placing a few
regenerators in strategic site(s), to regenerate the signal during restoration.
Efficient pool design means that Apollo uses the minimum quantity of shared regenerators necessary in
order to recover from multiple failures. Using shared resources enables a more efficient design while
reducing the total number of ports.
LightSOFT offers on-demand service provisioning, pinpoint bandwidth allocation, and dramatic
reductions in equipment and operating costs that multiple management systems often require. It does
this by providing complete network management from a single platform, including configuration, fault
management, performance management, administrative procedures, maintenance operations, and
security control. Within one integrated management system, LightSOFT's network manager enables
you to fully control all your NEs regardless of their manufacturer, and view the complete network at a
glance. Multiple operators can simultaneously configure the network without any conflicts.
Network provisioning, particularly in the data era, has become very complex. For example, tunnels must
be pre-provisioned with various protection schemes. Service configuration requires setting multiple
parameters for each service. LightSOFT offers a number of powerful automation tools to ease the
provisioning process, thereby saving valuable OPEX for service providers. More services can be
created in the same amount of time, which is directly reflected in revenues. Automation tools include
automatic creation of tunnels per network or per service, automatic creation of bypass tunnels, reusable
templates, automatic configuration of the tunnels needed for mesh topologies, and more.
LightSOFT's comprehensive, E2E perspective supports comprehensive definition of MPLS tunnels,
Ethernet services, and SDH/SONET and optical trails, for primary and protection paths. LightSOFT
supports all types of trails and links (MoT, MoE, EoS, ETY, SDH/SONET, optical), protection schemes,
and user constraints. Simply point and click to connect any two endpoints, even in the most complex
topology. LightSOFT provides powerful trail reconstruction options to reconcile discrepancies between
different layers, as well as batch traffic management capabilities. LightSOFT provides smoothly
integrated management for packet, optical, and MSPP-based platforms.
LightSOFT functions at the NML while STMS functions at the EML. A northbound interface can connect
either STMS or LightSOFT to your Operations Support System (OSS).
At the NEL, the Apollo features the local craft terminal (LCT) system, providing fast easy connectivity to
the NE and enabling access to configuration and management functions through a user-friendly GUI as
well as an efficient CLI.
Two types of LAG modes are supported: Load Sharing or 1:1 Protection. A typical LAG configuration is
illustrated in the following port properties window.
Whenever an ME is added to the network at the physical layer, an LE is automatically projected into the
relevant technology layer. If an ME contains ports that belong to multiple technologies, LEs are created
at each technology layer containing only the ports relevant to that layer. Nested groups are supported
and can be defined differently in the various layers.
Optical Data Unit (ODU) trails usually represent server trails for lower-rate Lightpath services
running on top of OCH trails, between appropriate OTU ports. An ODU trail can also act as a
service for comparable OTU services running between appropriate OTU ports.
LightPath (LP) trails represent an end-to-end service, running over ODU or OCH trails, between
client ports. If the line rate is equivalent to the client rate, then the LP runs directly over an OCH
trail. If the line rate is greater than the client rate, then the LP runs over an ODU server trail which
runs over the underlying OCH trail.
In a typical optical network, components are configured into a hierarchy of OMS, OCH, ODU, LP trails,
as illustrated in the following figure:
OMS trails run at the most basic, foundation level between multiplexing devices (MDs).
They can be unidirectional or bidirectional. They behave as server trails that carry multiple OCH trails in
fixed groups. DWDM is typically configured for 8, 16, 32, 44, 48, 88, 96 or flex-grid channel groups.
CWDM is configured for 4 or 8 channels. Amplifiers may be included in the path of an OMS trail.
Multiple OMSs, connected in tandem, cause alarms to be reported only with respect to the directly
associated OMS trail segments and not at other segments along the path.
LightSOFT also supports ODU packet trails, a special type of ODU server trail used to carry data
traffic over the OTN. These packet trails can have a main and a secondary component – the secondary
trail enables LAG-based resiliency of packet connectivity upon a failure of one of the two links – and
their bandwidth may be hitlessly adjusted, as per ITU recommendation G.7044. Each endpoint of an
ODU packet trail is always connected to a VPP (Virtual Packet Port), a virtual data port used to pass
data traffic over the OTN.
Hitless Adjustment of ODUflex (HAO) is a set of protocols which enables the user to perform
bandwidth resizing of the ODU packet server trail without a traffic hit, hence the name. HAO is defined
in ITU G.7044. HAO is initiated from LightSOFT, with participation of STMS at the EMS level.
LightSOFT simplifies provisioning and day-to-day monitoring of optical services. Information on light
paths, wavelengths, channel availability, rates, is available from optical links and optical trail lists.
LightSOFT provides fully automated optical trail provisioning, eliminating operator intervention at the
EMS level. Automatic trail provisioning is also vital in networks based on ROADMs and ODU cross-
connect that allow creation of complex mesh and ring network topologies at the wavelength and sub-
wavelength levels.
LightSOFT verifies the correctness of the endpoints and user-selected trails. Parameters such as
Forward Error Correction (FEC) and line code are checked, significantly reducing the chance of
configuration errors.
Once a path is selected, optical XCs are automatically provisioned on the NEs along the trail.
LightSOFT provides a table with a list of available frequencies across multiple OMS trails, making it
simple to select the frequency used at trail endpoints.
Creating and editing optical trails in single and bulk operations is possible using the XML file import
feature.
To enable proper gain setting and power equalization along the entire network, Apollo utilizes optical
network control parameters (s), a set of optical parameters transmitted periodically. They are generated
independently at a terminal or ROADM node, and are transmitted through the entire network.
LightSOFT enables LS operator to check the OSNR level of an optical trail during its creation and select
a different path if so indicated.
Network availability information can be exported to external applications in CSV format using a
command line.
Control map
Client/Server architecture
The LightSOFT network management suite implements an advanced client/server software architecture
that supports a large number of processes. The NMS server can be run on either single or multiple
workstations. This distributed architecture enables you to scale easily, as well as provide high
availability and load balancing. LightSOFT supports dozens of concurrent clients. The multiconfigurator
feature of LightSOFT gives each operator the means to initiate sessions and manage the network
simultaneously, either in whole or in part.
Optical parameters
Fiber connectivity
STMS supports fiber connectivity, for easy creation of links bottom-up to LightSOFT. Fiber connectivity
can be defined either bottom up (defined in STMS, and automatically uploaded to LightSOFT, or top-
down (defined in LightSOFT during topology link creation, and automatically downloaded to STMS).
The STMS GUI enables easy configuration of optical cross connections. When creating links in the
STMS, fiber connectivity information is uploaded to LightSOFT by default. LightSOFT creates the
relevant topology links and updates the link parameters accordingly.
Additional features include:
Optical protection (port and SNCP)
PM/FM profiles (shelf/card assignment and port/transceiver configuration)
Actual/Expected comparison for equipment preconfiguration
Inventory, maintenance, and port loopback operations
Timing configurations
Alien wavelength support enables installation and configuration of third party transceivers
Comprehensive network planning: The comprehensive and accurate data stored in the STMS
database enable effective network planning. Managed device, inventory, and available slot reports
assist capacity planning and inventory control. Device-monitoring capabilities prevent problems
from reaching a critical stage by providing proactive monitoring of components, such as CPU
utilization, file system size, memory usage, and device temperature, sending alerts when
thresholds are exceeded.
LightSOFT integration: STMS can be integrated with LightSOFT to support inventory
management, alarm management, WDM and OTN service management. It supports Multi
Technology Network Management (MTNM) CORBA-based interface. In addition, the rest of STMS
functionality is available with GUI cut-through (GCT). LightSOFT delivers comprehensive support
and management capabilities across multiple layers, networks, and technologies. The GCT
enables LightSOFT to open an STMS window in a specific context and allows the LightSOFT
operator to get to it quickly, thus providing a mechanism for performing any operation that is
available in STMS but not in LightSOFT.
Lite Packet support: STMS supports Apollo's Lite Packet feature, which provides MEF-compliant
Ethernet services over an ODU XC domain. Lite Packet includes the following capabilities:
LAG-based resiliency for packet connectivity
I/O port protection for packet ports that are not participating in a LAG configuration
BW on demand for packet connectivity, also known as hitless BW adaptation for ODUflex
(GFP-F)
Report generation: You can generate various types of reports using STMS. The reports are
saved in HTML format to the reports directory on the STMS server and can be viewed using a
web browser. You can change the default reports directory as required. The following STMS
reports are available:
Managed devices: General information about managed NEs. Reports can be generated for
the STMS domain (listing all managed NEs), for a group (listing all of the NEs in that group),
or for a single NE.
Inventory: General information about populated card cage slots. Reports can be generated
for the STMS domain (listing all managed NEs), for a group (listing all of the NEs in that
group), or for a single NE.
Available slots: List of available (empty) card cage slots. Reports can be generated for the
STMS domain (listing all managed NEs), for a group (listing all of the NEs in that group), or
for a single NE.
Customers: Information about the logical interfaces and E Line services assigned to
customers. Reports can be generated for all customers (listing the interfaces and services
assigned to each customer in your network) or for a single customer (listing only the
interfaces and services assigned to that customer).
Interface utilization: Utilization information about logical interfaces. Reports can be
generated for a single logical interface or for a single customer (listing all of the logical
interfaces assigned to that customer).
Security management: Security management features enable easy creation and management of
STMS users and permissions. The Action Log module also provides monitoring capabilities for
security management. Only users defined with Administrator and Security privileges have access
to all of the security management options. Other users are limited to minimal access to security
settings.
ASON/WSON protection and restoration: ASON/WSON-protected trails are created and
managed at the NMS level through LightSOFT. STMS offers the ability to view
ASON/WSON-related information for a selected NE.
License management: A License Manager manages STMS licenses. Some STMS features are
only available if the relevant license has been purchased. Use the License Manager to view a list
of available features and to update licensing as required.
CLI commands
Configuration:
In configuration mode, you create and edit the configuration of the device, such as interfaces,
routing protocols, routing policy, and CoS parameters. Configuration changes are not
implemented until the user commits them, at which time the changes are pushed out to the
hardware.
The configuration statements are also organized into a hierarchical structure. Because the
configuration is structured, you view the configuration statement and determine the command you
would use to set, edit, or delete the statement.
For example, the command to configure a Gigabit Ethernet interface with an IP address is set
interfaces ge-ts1/0 unit 0 family inet address 172.18.1.154/24
When you display the configuration, it displays as:
interfaces {
ge-ts1/0 {
unit 0 {
family inet {
address 172.18.1.154/24;
}
}
}
}
The structure of the command statements also allow you to edit and delete parts of the statements
at different levels. For example, to delete only the IP address from the previous configuration, you
type:
delete interfaces ge-ts1/0 unit 0 family inet address
172.18.1.154/24
To delete the entire configuration for interface ge-ts1/0, you type:
delete interfaces ge-ts1/0
CLI is also used to load NE configuration files and/or XML files. Initial NE installation or NE expansion is
faster and easier when loading an NE configuration generated by a planning tool.
Most of the debug, output, and show commands are very similar to JunOS CLI, which purposely makes
the 24 x 7 first line support of the product very familiar.
17.4 NETCONF
The Network Configuration protocol (NETCONF) is an IETF network management protocol published in
RFC 4741 (2006) and revised in RFC6241 (2011). NETCONF has gained strong industry support and
is being adopted by major network equipment providers as the primary candidate for provisioning
network functions. Using protocols like NETCONF and data models such as YANG, SDN controllers
can provision services across vendor and technology domains because they have a standardized
method to provision different network functions, using a consistent set of data models.
NETCONF is specifically not meant to replace SNMP, but rather to provide significant improvements in
the area of configuration management, by offering Seamless integration with existing and future
OSS/BSS environments. The loosely-coupled and modular architecture leverages open APIs and
standard protocols, enabling orchestration across multi-domain and multi-layer for centralized policy
and services across the entire network. NETCONF provides universal mechanisms to install,
manipulate, and delete network device configurations. Operations are realized on top of a simple
Remote Procedure Call (RPC) layer. The NETCONF protocol uses XML based data encoding for the
configuration data as well as the protocol messages.
NETCONF is designed to be a replacement for CLI-based programming interfaces, such as Perl +
Expect over Secure Shell (SSH). NETCONF is usually transported over the SSH protocol using the
“NETCONF” sub-system, and in many ways it mimics the native proprietary CLI over SSH interface
available in a device. However, it uses structured schema-driven data and provides detailed structured
error return information, which CLI cannot provide.
NETCONF is based on ACID to define a transaction:
Atomicity: Transactions are like a bulk operation, where the whole set either takes or it fails.
Consistency: Transactions can be implemented simultaneously. They are not order-dependent as
with CLI. If this cannot be done, the implication is that the system is not transactional.
Independence: Parallel transactions are independent. They do not conflict, and always appear to
be in-sequence.
Durability: Committed data is not expected to be withdrawn.
NETCONF provides operators with a standardized method to distribute changes to participating devices
and validate them locally before activating them. This is accomplished through a system of data stores
and device states. For example, configuration data can be sent to candidate databases in the devices
before they are committed to running in production applications. This is illustrated in the lower two rows
of the following figure.
NETCONF datastores
All NETCONF devices must allow the configuration data to be locked, edited, saved, and unlocked. In
addition, all modifications to the configuration data must be saved in non-volatile storage. A typical
example from RFC 4741 illustrates this approach. The following code sample adds an interface named
“Ethernet0/0” to the running configuration, replacing any previous interface with that name.
NETCONF provides operators with a standardized, regimented, yet flexible means to manipulate
network device configuration, using XML with an applied structure that can be validated effectively.
YANG (Yet Another Next Generation) data modeling language is used to model configuration and state
data. The YANG modeling language was defined in RFC 6020 by IETF through the NETCONF Data
Modeling Language Working Group (NETMOD). YANG extensions allow codeless, intuitive, GUI-based
modeling and provisioning. This enables operators to provide higher level abstraction for orchestrating
and automating devices and network services.
YANG is tree-structured rather than object-oriented. Configuration data is organized into a tree
hierarchy, and the data can be of complex types such as lists and unions. The definitions are contained
in modules, where one module can augment the tree within another module. YANG also differentiates
between configuration and operational data. YANG differs from previous network management data
model languages by its strong support of constraints and data validation rules. Strong revision rules are
defined for modules.
Apollo platforms support open interfaces using NETCONF/YANG. We are a member in the
OpenROADM MSA (http://openroadm.org/ http://www.openroadm.org/) and part of the group
implementing the OpenROADM data model. As an active participant in professional conferences such
as SC19 (International Conference for High Performance Computing, Networking, Storage, and
Analysis, and OFC 2020 (Optical Fiber Communications Conference and Exhibition), we have
demonstrated openness and interoperability with 3rd party OpenROADM optical domain controllers
(ODC), together with OTN and standard FEC interoperability. We have achieved:
E2E service creation directly from AT&T controller using only NETCONF/YANG
Line rate interoperability with 3rd party switchponders using SC-FEC
OTN switching interoperability with 3rd party switchponders
Equipment hierarchy also includes modules that are extractable with multiple transceivers. Port is a
bundle of equipment and/or L1 interfaces and services. When the port contains transceiver FRU, it
reports equipment alarms. Only in such a case is the port part of equipment hierarchy.
Double-wide slot
Quad slot
The slot numbering is identical for single-slot cards and double-slot cards in both service shelves (e.g.
OPT9624, OPT9608) and passive shelves (e.g. Artemis-1P, Artemis-4A).
The following figure depicts the identical slot numbering in the case of double-slot card.
The slot numbering is different in double-wide cards as shown in the following figure.
The slot numbering is different in quad cards as shown in the following figure.
L1 interface entity
The L1 interface may have hierarchy in the case of OTN technology, as shown in the following figure.
L1 interface hierarchy
Inventory information of a main shelf also provides inventory information of subtending passive shelves.
The above minimal equipment configuration is also applicable for subtending service shelves.
The Apollo NEs support live insertion and extraction of equipment without affecting traffic.
The user can configure multiple entities of the same type, using the Copy command via the CLI or
STMS. For example, if the user has configured a slot, he doesn't have to repeat the changes manually
to another slot in the same or other shelves. He can use this slot as a template and copy it's
configuration to another slot. This functionality is also supported for cards and shelves of the same
type.
18.3.5 Transactions
Apollo supports transactions, enabling the user to perform several configuration activities in a single set
of commands. Transaction can be composed of a single or several changes followed by the "commit"
command. The result of a transaction can be "OK" or "Fail". Partial successful configuration is
impossible. The order of commands is not mandatory as long as all commands are part of the same
transaction.
The following are examples of successful and failed transactions:
Example 1
1. To assign on slot u2 trp10-4 and configure port 1 as otu2, use the following set of commands:
Set chassis slot u2 phye-tr10-4 port 1 port-type otu2
2. To assign on slot u3 tr10-4 and configure port 2 as otu2, use the following set of commands:
Set chassis slot u3 phye-tr10-4 port 2 port-type otu2
3. To define fiber connectivity between the above two ports, use the following set of commands:
Set chassis slot u2 phye-tr10-4 port 1 fiber-connectivity internal bidirectional peer-slot u3
peer-port 2
Commit
The result of these transactions will be: Successful transaction
Example 2
To define fiber connectivity between two ports u2 and u3, use the following set of commands:
Set chassis slot u2 phye-tr10-4 port 1 fiber-connectivity internal bidirectional peer-slot u3
peer-port 2
Commit
The result of these transactions will be: Transaction fails (because the cards and ports are not
defined)
The RCP card in each NE processes and controls the optical components having internal fiber
connectivity configuration. It uses the in-band communication channels (i.e., GCC or OSC) to convey
the optical information for optical components that are external fiber connected. The following figure
shows the power control and equalization in the network.
In addition, the measured signal values are processed by management which uses an advanced
algorithm to adjust power levels in the entire network in an optimal way, and to automatically
compensate for changes such as span loss over the network operational lifetime. The algorithm also
analyzes operational conditions, such as number of channels, span loss, and accumulated noise, and
the configuration parameters of the various optical components, and compares them with various user-
defined and automatically generated thresholds to determine the optimal conditions and the method
used to respond to changes.
The STMS station downloads the NE configuration and intra connectivity information to XML files, and
sends them to LightSOFT. LightSOFT exports the network topology, services, trails, and intra node
connectivity information to Planning Tools via XML. Planning Tools processes the information and the
updated information is sent back to LightSOFT, retrieved by the STMS, and updates the NE.
In case the ROADM card is reset or pulled out of its slot, the NE would normally generate a ROADM
alarm and all cards connected to the ROADM would also generate alarms. It would be very difficult for
the user to identify the problem. The alarm correlation feature ensures that only the root cause of the
failure generates an alarm, making troubleshooting much easier and more accurate.
The user can use the parameters to manually configure the power control and equalization system
accordingly, so that critical optical parameters are considered by the system and power control and
equalization is maintained.
In addition to the management interfaces listed previously, additional optional means can be provided
for alarms control and display:
Local displays, including LEDs that indicate malfunctions of specific plug-in units or transmission
paths
Alarm contacts, delivering critical, major, and minor alarm indications to the station alarm bus
Rack alarm buzzer with station acknowledgment mechanism
Alarm server, delivering network aggregated alarms from LightSOFT to the operator's Central
Monitoring Station (CMS)
Alarm inputs from in-station devices (such as security sensors, fire detectors, external monitoring
equipment) and other in-station telecommunications equipment (like flexible multiplexers and
DWDM units)
19.5 Troubleshooting
In the event of an alarm, troubleshooting procedures are used to determine the severity and location of
the problem and the appropriate alarm-clearing action.
Alarms are handled first by severity and then by type. In order of priority, alarm types are:
Equipment
Transmission
Timing
Each card is a standalone unit. By adopting our modular system concept, the customer's planning and
maintenance personnel achieve flexible and efficient operation. By following a simple procedure,
maintenance personnel can quickly replace faulty cards or other assemblies. Faulty units are then sent
for repair to the assigned Customer Support Center. The easy maintenance concept of Apollo allows
the user to perform these repairs and test actions:
Connecting/disconnecting cable fibers to/from the Apollo
Removing/inserting any cards in Apollo cards cage when power is on
Connecting/disconnecting power cable(s) to/from the system
Performing system test procedures
Removing/inserting I/O modules